Atlasco Manual

Rockson International Group
National Integrated Power Plant

Lot 4
225MW Power Project at Gbarain,
Bayelsa State
Manufactured By:
SN: 1061089
Rockson PO# RK/114
THIS PAGE IS LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
Table of Contents
Compressed Air Equipment
Lot 4
225MW Power Project at Gbarain,
Bayelsa State
SN: 1061089
Section 1 Drawings
 Process & Instrument Drawings (LT4-ID-GL-001)
 General Layout Drawings (LT4-MD-GL-001)
 Electrical Drawings (LT4-ED-GL-002)
Section 2 Bill of Material

 1061089 BOM
Section 3 Compressor – Atlas Copco ZT110-10HAT

 Compressor - Oil Free Rotary Screw – Literature/Technical Data
 Compressor - Oil Free Rotary Screw –Data Sheet
Section 4 Dryer – Atlas Copco AD300

 Dryer – Heat Regenerative Desiccant - Literature
 Dryer – Heat Regenerative Desiccant – Technical Data
Section 5 AfterCooler – AKG Thermal CC600-3

 Performance, Dimension & Motor Specs
1061089-Table of Contents Page 1 of 2

Table of Contents
Section 6 Pressure & Temperature Instrumentation
 Pressure Transmitter- INVENSYS, IDP10-T22C21F-M1L1
 Pressure Transmitter Gauge- INVENSYS, IGP10-T22D1F-L1
 Pressure Regulator- SMC, AR20-N02BE-Z
 Pressure Gauge- Ashcroft, 35-1009SW-L-02L-0/200
 Thermometer- Trerice, B836-06-05C 6 In/ B836-02-05C 2.5 In
 Thermowell- Trerice, 76-3JK/ 76-4J6
Section 7 Valves
 Control Valve- Cashco, 424-5107-5A1A000D
 Relief Valve- Kunkle, 6010GFEKM-0200
 Ball Valve- Sharpe, 49114R 2” / 49116R 2” / 49116R 3”
 Needle Valve- Marsh, N1534/ N1334
Section 8 Accessories
 Air Receiver- Silvan Tank, TNK-27-54-760.4-200, 760 Gal.
 RoboDrain- Air System Products, ACCOM RD11-T
1061089-Table of Contents Page 2 of 2

D
Section 1
R
A
W
Drawings
I
N
Process & Instrumentation Drawing G
LT4-ID-GL-001
General Arrangement Drawing

LT4-MD-GL-001
Electrical Drawing
LT4-ED-GL-002
Section 2 B
I
Bill of Material L
1061089 BOM L
O
F
M
A
T
E
R
I
A
L
Bill of Materials
To: ROCKSON INTERNATIONAL GROUP Date: 4/22/2010

LTD
Project: LOT 4
225MW POWER PROJECT AT GBARAIN, BAYELSA STATE
Serial No. 1061089

Item
Qty Tag No. Manufacturer Part No. Description
No
ATLAS COPCO - OIL FREE ROTARY SCREW COMPRESSOR, AIR COOLED,
1 2 ACU-ZT110-10 HAT
150HP, 10BAR/ 150PSI WITH HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE.
2 2 ACU-AD300 ATLAS COPCO - DESICCANT DRYER.
AKG THERMAL - FOR AIR PROCESS W/ INTERNAL FLOW RATE OF
456CFM, EXTERNAL AIRFLOW OF 2765.1CFM. 264.7 BTU/MIN HEAT
3 2 CC600-3 REJECTION. MAXIMUM PRESSURE: 250PSI, MAC TEMP: 250DEG F.
ALUMINUM COOLER, STEEL SHROUD, GUARD AND BRACKETS. 2-IN NPT
PORTS. 1HP MTR, 1725RPM, 50HZ/415V.
TNK-27-54-760.4-
4 4 SILVAN - ASME VERTICAL AIR RECIVER AT 200PSI. 54-IN DIA.
200
AIR SYSTEM PRODUCTS - ROBO DRAIN PNEUMATIC CONDENSATE DRAIN
5 4 ACCOM-RD11-T
WITH TEST BUTTON. MAX 250PSI WITH 80-120PSI CONTROL AIR
SHARP - SERIES 49, CLASS 150, 3-IN, SS, FLANGED, FULL PORT BALL
6 8 49116R-3IN
VALVE, W/ BLOW OUT PROOF STEM & LOCKING DEVICE
7 4 49114R-2IN SHARP - SERIES 49, CLASS 150, 2-IN, STAINLESS STEEL
SHARP - SERIES 49, CLASS 150, 2-IN, SS, FLANGED, FULL PORT BALL
8 8 49116R-2IN VALVE, W/ BLOW OUT PROOF STEM AND LOCKING DEVICE
INVENSYS - WITH DIGITAL HART & 4-20mA OUTPUT SIGNAL. 316SS
IDP10-T22C21F- PROCESS COVER & SENSOR, SIL FILLED. 7 & 210 kPa, 28 & 840 IN H2O, 70
9 4
M1L1 AND 2100 MBAR. 1/2-IN MPT PROCESS CONN & CONDUIT CONN, AL
HOUSING. DIGITAL INDICATOR, INTERNAL PUSHBUTTON & WINDOW CVR.
INVENSYS - INTEL ELEC DIRECT CONNECT GAUGE PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER MODEL IGP10, DIGITAL HART & 4 TP 20mA, 316L SS1/2NPT
10 4 IGP10-T22D1F-L1 EXT &1/4NPT INT. THD CONN.,.07 &2.1 MPa, 10 & 300psi, .70 & 21 BAR, (2)
1/2-IN CONDUIT CONN., CLASS 1 DIV 2, DIG INDICATOR, INTERNAL
BUTTONS & COVER
11 9 N1534 KEROTEST/MARSH - NEEDLE VALVE, CS, 1/2-IN
12 10 N1334 KEROTEST/MARSH - NEEDLE VALVE, SS, 1/2-IN
35-1009SW-L-02L-
13 5 ASHCROFT - DURALIFE PRESSURE GAUGE
0/200PSI:0/14BAR
14 4 6010GFEKM-0200 KUNKLE - RELIEF VALVE, 1.25X1.5-IN, 200#
15 4 AR20-N02BE-Z SMC - W/ PRESSURE GAUGE IN PSI, 125 MAX PRESSURE SETTING
CASHCO - GLOBE STYLE CONTROL VALVE, 2-IN FULL PORT, BRONZE
BODY WITH SS WETTED PARTS, AIR TO OPEN, FAIL TO CLOSED, 5-15
16 2 424-5107-5A1A000D
PSIG BENCH RANGE. WITH DIRECT ACTING I/P 4-20mA POSITIONER WITH
AIRSET. TUBING: IMPOLENE W BRASS FTGS, NPT CONNECTION.
19 5 B836-02-05C TRERICE- 6-IN STEM -10/115 C
17 4 B836-06-05C TRERICE - 2.5-IN STEM -10/115 C
18 4 76-3JK TRERICE - 1/2-IN PROCESS CONNECTION
20 5 76-4J6 TRERICE - 1/2-IN INSTRUMENT, 3/4-IN PROCESS
10610889BOM 1
Bill of Materials
Item
Qty Tag No. Manufacturer Part No. Description
No
VESSEL
21 1 ALTERATION OF NOZZLES ON CODE VESSELS
ALTERATION
22 2 AC-1617-7082-02 ATLAS COPCO COMPRESSOR INC.
CONSISITING OF:
- (1) COOLING AIR INLET WEATHER COVER
1061088-
23 2 - (1) COOLING AIR OUTLET WEATHER COVER
WEATHERHOOD - (1) MOTOR COOLING AIR INLET WEATHER COVER
- (1) MOTOR COOLING AIR OUTLET WEATHER COVER
24 1 1061089-INSULATE FRONTIER INSULATION CONTRACTORS, INC.
1061089-
25 1 MERZ METAL & MACHINE CORP
END_PANELS
26 1 ROCKSON ADDER STORAGE FEE
10610889BOM 2
Section 3 A
I
R
Atlas Copco
Air Compressor C
O
Model:
M
ZT110-10 HAT
P
R
E
S
S
O
R
Atlas Copco
Oil-free rotary screw compressors
ZR/ZT 110-750-FF & ZR/ZT 132-900 VSD-FF

110-935 kW/150-1253 hp
ZT110-10HAT
Setting the standard in
energy efficiency, safety and reliability
 Energy, safety & reliability
The shortest route to superior productivity is to minimize op- guaranteeing the utmost reliability around the clock. And not just
erational cost. The Atlas Copco Z compressor series is focused today, but day after day, year after year, with minimal mainte-
on effectively saving energy, ensuring product safety – only nance cost, few service interventions and long overhaul intervals.
oil-free machines exclude contamination risks for 100% – and
Choice The right drive Optimal use

Atlas Copco masters each compression Fixed speed machines are fine at full load Central control of a multi-compressor
principle and offers the most energy efficient but when air demand fluctuates, a Variable installation can reduce the pressure band
technology for the application. Speed Drive ensures substantial savings. and achieve the lowest overall energy cost.
Complete safety
Process, products and environment
are safeguarded from contamination.
The only air compressors TÜV-certified
as “oil-free” (ISO 8573-1 CLASS 0).
Expertise The integrated design Trouble-free installation & commissioning

Since 1903, Atlas Copco’s philosophy has Internal piping, Variable Speed Drive, The ZR oil-free compressor is truly plug-and-play.
been to continually improve our products 100 % matched components... the Put it on a flat floor, connect the power line and
through intensive R&D, with the aim to only way to ensure total reliability. the air outlet… and push the start button.
maximize the value for our customers.
Energy recovery
Heat from compression can be recovered
Energy
and put to good use in pre-heating of boiler
feed water, heating of buildings etc.
Safety
The professional follow-up

Service Contracts will ensure you of the right
maintenance, immediate response and genuine
spare parts… all over the globe. Reliability
ISO 8573-1 CLASS 0
Atlas Copco sets a new industry standard
Class zero
When it comes to clean, oil-free compressed air

for your critical processes, you can’t afford to
compromise. Atlas Copco, a pioneer in oil-free air
screw technology, is known for its range of com-
pressors designed especially for applications that
require oil-free air.
Now Atlas Copco has achieved a new milestone:

Setting the standard for air purity as the first man-
ufacturer to be certified ISO 8573-1 CLASS 0.
Why a new class? First to achieve ISO 8573-1 CLASS 0
Industries such as pharmaceuticals, food and beverages, As the industry leader committed to meeting the needs of the
electronics and textiles must exclude any risk of contamination. most demanding customers, Atlas Copco requested the renowned
Otherwise severe consequences could follow: spoiled or unsafe TÜV institute to type-test its Z range of oil-free screw compres-
products, production downtime and damage to both brand and sors. Using the most rigorous testing methodologies available, all
reputation. To address the needs of critical applications where possible oil forms were measured across a range of temperatures
air purity is essential, the ISO 8573-1 compressed air standard and pressures. The TÜV found no traces of oil at all in the output
was revised in 2001. Along with a more comprehensive measur- air stream. Thus Atlas Copco not only became the first compressor
ing methodology, a new and more stringent class was added to manufacturer to receive CLASS 0 certification, but also exceeded
the five existing purity classes: ISO 8573-1 CLASS 0. ISO 8573-1 CLASS 0 specifications.
CLASS
Concentration total oil Atlas Copco eliminates any risk
(aerosol, liquid, vapour) mg/m3
As specified by the equipment user or supplier Only oil-free compressors deliver oil-free air. Whether your
0 activities are in pharmaceutical production, food processing, criti-
and more stringent than class 1
cal electronics or a similarly exacting industry, it is essential to
1 ≤ 0.01 eliminate risk. That’s why you need an Atlas Copco risk-free so-
lution: oil-free screw compressors especially for applications de-
2 ≤ 0.1
manding the highest levels of purity. Zero oil means zero risk. Zero
3 ≤1 risk of contamination. Zero risk of damaged or unsafe products.
Zero risk of losses from operational downtime. Above all, zero oil
4 ≤5
means zero risk of ruining your hard-won reputation.
The most stringent air purity testing
available
Most manufacturers prefer “partial flow” testing, which tar-
gets only the center of the air flow. The Atlas Copco Z range of
oil-free screw compressors was tested using the more stringent
“full flow” method. This examines the entire air flow to measure
aerosols, vapors and wall flow. Even with such rigorous testing,
no traces of oil were found in the output air stream. TÜV (Technische Überwachungsverein/Technical Monitoring Association)
reporting on the Atlas Copco Z range of oil-free screw compressors
Can oil-injected compressors with oil removal filters deliver oil-free air?
Often referred to as “technically oil-free air”, Z-Oil-free rotary screw compressor

this system relies on air cooling devices (e.g.
refrigeration dryers) and several stages of oil
removal with multiple components. A failure
of any of these components or inadequate Oil content: Stage 1 Intercooler Stage 2 Aftercooler Oil content:
Typically CLASS ZERO
maintenance can result in oil contamina- 0-0,003 mg/m3 0 mg/m3
tion of a process. Therefore, with oil-injected Oil-injected compressor with filters

compressors there will always be a risk of Oil is injected Oil separator
contamination and the possibility of severe
consequences for your business.
Oil content: Stage 1 Oil is partly Aftercooler Oil removal filters Oil content*
Typically removed
0-0,003 mg/m3
Move up to a risk-free standard. * If low ambient temperature + clean filters = Class 2 edition 2001 (≤ 0.1 mg/m3)
Visit www.classzero.com If high ambient temperature + saturated filters = Class 3 edition 2001 (≤ 1 mg/m3)
Proven Z-technology
in one complete package
1 Advanced Elektronikon control and monitoring system

Watercooled ZR 250 2 Oil-free screw compression element
3 High efficiency coolers and water separator
4 Inlet compensators on all piping connections
4 3
Watercooled ZR: ZR/ZT 110-750-FF and

air/oil/coolant flow ZR/ZT 132-900 VSD-FF
Capacity range (50 & 60 Hz)
Air filter
Air in
ZR 110-275-FF ZR 300-750
Low pressure High pressure
element element ZR 132-315VSD-FF ZR 400-900 VSD
ZT 110-275-FF
ZT 132-315 VSD-FF
0 120 260 2500 l/s

7 15 150 m 3 /min
250 550 5300 cfm
Intercooler
Aftercooler
air ZT: Aircooled / ZR: Watercooled / VSD: Variable Speed Drive / FF: Full Feature.
Air out water See data pages for range details.
oil
Efficient intake air filtration
Aircooled ZT 160 VSD-FF
1
2 Integrated frequency converter for Variable Speed Drive operation

3 IP55 totally enclosed high efficiency electric motor Integrated VSD, Full Feature
4 Built-in IMD adsorption dryer version with IMD dryer
3 4
Complete ZR/ZT range Aircooled ZT-FF:

air/oil/coolant flow
Air filter
Air in
ZR 55-750
Low pressure High pressure
ZR 75-900 VSD element element
ZT 55-275
ZT 75-315 VSD
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 l/s

30 60 90 120 150 m 3 /min
1060 2120 3180 4240 5300 cfm Air out
Aftercooler Intercooler
(with pre-cooler) Oilcooler (with pre-cooler)
Superior design in every detail
Proven Z-technology
World class oil-free compression element Reliable element intake protection

 unique Z-seal design guarantees 100 % oil-free air  machine mounted, easy to maintain air filter
 operation far below critical speed  minimum intake losses
 high overall efficiency, thanks to:
– superior rotor coating

– element cooling jackets
 no oil ‘clean up’ problems
High precision drive system
AGMA Q13/DIN Class 5 gears

 long lifetime
 low transmission losses
 low noise and vibration
Superior element bearings

 high stability under varying load conditions
 no need for pre-lubrication/stabilisation time
 bearings operate below wear limit
Totally enclosed motor

 IP55 TEFC protection against dust and humidity
 high efficiency
Cooling system designed for life Reliability in every detail
High efficiency + high reliability water cooling (ZR) Water separator

 corrosion resistant stainless steel tubing  the labyrinth design efficiently separates the condensate
 highly reliable robot welding; no risk for leaks from the compressed air
 aluminium star insert increases heat transfer  low moisture carry-over protects downstream equipment:
 cooling water outside tubes guided by baffles – long High Pressure element lifetime
– no dead zones – limited fouling – better dryer performance
– no degradation in cooler performance
– easy cleaning
– very long service intervals Inlet valve
 air operated diaphragm
 lowest unloaded power by tuning with bypass screw
 mechanical interlock of inlet and blow-off valves
High efficiency + high reliability air cooling (ZT)

 stainless steel pre-cooler with fins
 excellent heat transfer
 easy access for cleaning
 low noise + low energy cooling fans
Advanced Elektronikon® control and monitoring system

 overall system performance status with pro-active service
indications, alarms for malfunctions and safety shutdowns
 multi-language selectable display
 all monitoring and control functions via one interface
 wide communication possibilities
 integration possible in many process control systems
(field bus system)

Why Variable Speed Drive (VSD) compressors?
Direct energy savings of up to 35% Indirect energy savings
 Unload losses are reduced to a minimum  The lower system pressure obtained by VSD results in up
 No blow-off of compressed air to the atmosphere to 10% additional yearly savings:
 Load/no load transition losses are eliminated – lower energy consumption of (other) base load machines
 The precise pressure control of the VSD compressor allows – leak losses are significantly reduced: e.g. leakage at 6
for a tighter pressure band and a lower average working bar is 13 % lower than at 7 bar
pressure, resulting in reduced energy consumption – most compressed air applications consume less air at a
reduced pressure
Additional VSD benefits
 The stable system pressure provides stability for all

processes using compressed air.
investment energy savings with VSD
maintenance
energy Pressure - standard load-unload - 0.5 bar
Pressure - turbo-modulating - 0.2 bar
Pressure - VSD - 0.1 bar
0.5
bar
Process pressure
Predicting your savings  No current peaks during start-up

Call upon the expertise of Atlas Copco specialists and have an as- – unlimited starting and stopping
sessment carried out in your factory. A detailed report will show – no risk of current peak penalties upon starting
your current operation and the achievable savings when adding a
VSD solution to your compressed air system.
800
Star Delta
% Full load current
DOL
Soft Starter
VSD
400
0 10 20
Seconds
 Savings in electrical installation - smaller breakers, fuses,

transformers and cables.
Rectifier
AC input
50 or 60 Hz
The magic of VSD

DC link
Inverter
AC input 50 or 60 Hz
AC output 25 to 150 Hz* Line reactors
AC output
5-150 Hz*
The frequency of the drive motor is continuously adapted to the

fluctuating air demand.
RFI filter
* Depending on type
Integrated VSD - The only way 1 Elektronikon® controls compressor and inverter
 maximum machine safety
 easy networking of the compressor
2 EMC tested and certified

 maximum operating range
 no influence of external sources
 no emissions to other equipment
1
3 Motor specifically designed for VSD
2  bearings protected against induced bearing currents
3
 motor & converter perfectly tuned to obtain best efficiency
4 over entire speed range
 optimized cooling air flow
5
4 Mechanical enhancements
 proper lubrication to gears and bearings for all speeds
 all components operate below critical vibrations
5 Tested over complete speed range

 elimination of “speed windows”, ensuring stable pressure and
consistent energy savings
Combined motor/converter efficiency
100 %
Operating range
non-integrated
solution
Atlas Copco
integrated solution integrated VSD
non-integrated VSD
speed windows
minimum maximum minimum maximum

Flow Motor speed
The Full Feature compressor –
a compact, all-in-one quality air solution
Dry compressed air out of the box

1
 The Full Feature concept is a total installation, providing 4
dry compressed air. Integrating the IMD dryer and its Vari-
able Speed Drive on VSD models, this compact package
offers high quality air at the lowest cost. 5
 The IMD adsorption dryer eliminates the moisture before

it enters the air net, ensuring a reliable process and an
2
impeccable end product. 3
No external energy is needed to dry the air, resulting

in large savings.
 The pressure drop through the dryer is minimal, which

again cuts down the operating cost.
 The IMD dryer needs no purge air: no compressed air is

wasted.
The IMD drying principle
 The Full Feature compressor is a pre-wired and pre-piped 1 Hot unsaturated air
solution, ready to use. 2 Hot saturated air
3 Cold saturated air
4 Dry air
5 Drying section
Watercooled
ZR 160 VSD-FF
Energy savings with Full Feature/MD
Direct savings
The IMD drying process requires no external energy; over time
this results in large savings.
80 000
IMD savings
Energy savings* (€/$/year)

70 000
Refrigerant dryer
60 000 Heat reactivated dryer
50 000 Heatless dryer
40 000
30 000
20 000
10 000
0
0 500
0 1060 1000
1500
2120 2000 Flow
3180 I/s
4240 cfm
* Assumptions: 1kWh = 0.05 €/$ – 8000 h/year
Indirect savings
Other than direct energy input, the pressure drop in dryers causes
indirect energy consumption as well. IMD dryers have a very low
pressure drop, which leads to a further reduction in energy cost.
4000
3500
Yearly savings* (€/$)
3000
Overall system control and monitoring 2500
 One integrated control system for compressor and dryer 2000
 Monitoring of the IMD dryer includes:
1500
– Temperature readings of 1000
• IMD dryer inlet and outlet 500
for each S avings
0.1 bar (1
• regeneration air inlet and outlet 0 .4 psi ) press
ure drop
• mix air inlet 0 500
1000 1500
1060 2000
– Pressure dewpoint after the IMD (option) 2120 3180 2500 3000 I/s
Flow
4240
5300 6360
– Loading reporting of dryer cfm
CustomDesign
 The answer to every non-standard question
The new generation of Z-compressors is designed as standard All this of course retaining the high standards on energy, safety
to perform in a wide range of operating and site conditions. and reliability, inherent to all Atlas Copco products.
However some environments call for additional measures. For all With dedicated teams in both Product Companies and Regional
those special requests Atlas Copco’s CustomDesign department Engineering Centers CustomDesign offers close-to-home solutions
offers an adequate solution. fitting your applications world-wide.
 Customizing the standard products to fit your local plant

standards. Meeting these standards on electrical voltage,
colour coatings, explosion proof zones, documentation, test
and inspection requirements…
 Designing products to secure operation in harsh environ-

ments. Allow outdoor installation in sub-zero temperatures,
increase corrosion resistance for windy coastal and off-
shore applications or ensure performance in hot, moist or
dusty environments…
 Extending the range to nitrogen compressors and booster

units to suit your specific application…
Global presence – local service
Our Aftermarket product portfolio is designed to add maximum

value for our customers by ensuring the optimum availability and
reliability of their compressed air equipment with the lowest pos-
sible operating costs.We deliver this complete service guarantee
through our extensive Aftermarket organization, maintaining our
position as the leader in compressed air.
Full range of available Aftermarket products
Activity Product*
Genuine parts Atlas Copco Service kits & oils

Extended warranties AIRXtend
Service contracts ServicePlan
System audits AIRScan ™
Remote monitoring AIRConnect ™
Energy saving AIROptimizer ™
Product improvements Upgrade programs
* More information is available from your local Atlas Copco customer

centre
The perfect match for your needs
 Z-compressors
The new generation of Z-compressors provides unprecedent-

ed freedom to select the right features for your specific needs.
The compressor you want is the compressor we build.
Z Pressure Z Cooling
50 Hz: ZR: watercooled

7.5 bar ZT: aircooled (up to 315 kW)
8.6 bar
10 bar
13 bar (only on ZR145/250/275)
60 Hz: Z Motor drive
7 bar / 100 psi
8.6 bar / 125 psi Fixed Speed Drive
10.4 bar / 150 psi Variable Speed Drive (VSD) - saving up to
13 bar / 188 psi (only on ZR145/250/275) 35% in energy costs
Z Capacity (power) Z Dryer
110 kW (fixed speed) MD dryer for dry air at no energy cost:

132 kW (fixed speed & VSD - Variable Speed Drive) integrated IMD for Z 110-275 and Z 132-315 VSD
145 kW (fixed speed) free-standing MD for ZR 300-750 and ZR 400-900 VSD
160 kW (fixed speed & VSD - Variable Speed Drive) BD/XD dryer for very dry air
200 kW (fixed speed) Compressor without dryer
250 kW (fixed speed & VSD - Variable Speed Drive)
275 kW (fixed speed)
315 kW (fixed speed & VSD - Variable Speed Drive) Z In/outdoor
400 kW (fixed speed & VSD - Variable Speed Drive) Standard package for indoor use
425 kW (fixed speed) Outdoor variant mounted in a standard container
450 kW (fixed speed) (up to 315 kW)
500 kW (fixed speed & VSD - Variable Speed Drive)
700 kW (VSD - Variable Speed Drive)
750 kW (fixed speed) Z Ambient temperature
900 kW (VSD - Variable Speed Drive)
Standard machine: operating range between 0 and 40 °C
HAT (High Ambient Temperature) version: operating range
between 0 and 50 °C
Winterization option: temperatures to -20 °C
(only on outdoor variant)
Complete scope suiting all needs
 Features and benefits
Numerous features are included as standard. Some applications

may also need or benefit from one of the factory installed options.
Standard
Air intake filter and silencer Complete oil circuit pre-piped
Air intake flexible Built-in oil breather system
Stainless steel inter and aftercooler cores * AGMA class 13, DIN class 5 gears
Outlet air silencer Electric IP 55 motors pre-mounted **
Six sided silencing canopy Starters **
Terminal expansion joints – air and water side Pre-mounted electrical and VSD cubicles
Outlet air flange Skid with no need for foundations
Complete integrated water circuit * Suppression of emissions/harmonic distortions in VSD
Single point inlet and outlet cooling water connection *
Back-flush arrangement for cooler cleaning *
* Only for watercooled versions

** Standard on LV, optional on MV
ZR132-315VSD
ZR400-900VSD
ZT132-315VSD
ZR110-275
ZR300-750
ZT110-275
Options
Energy recovery • • • •
Hot air version (= without aftercooler) • • • • • •
HAT (High Ambient Temperature) version • • • • • •
Teflon-free elements • • • • • •
Pre-filter kit • • • •
Separate air intake • • • • • •
Automatic water shut off valve • • • •
Thermostatic water valve • •
Electronic drain std std std std • std
ANSI flange(s) for air (and water) connections • • • • • •
Duplex oil filters • • • • • •
IP55 (TEFC) enclosure for MV motors (1) std on LV std std on LV std std on LV std
Anti condensation heater for motor • • • • • •
Heavy duty dust filter for VSD inverter •
PT1000 motor winding protection • • • • • •
PT1000 motor bearing protection • • • • • std
Oversized motor • • •
MODBUS interface • • • • • •
PROFIBUS interface • • • • • •
ETHERNET/IP interface • • • • • •
Remote speed or setpoint control • • •
Witness performance test (2) • • • • • •
Performance test certificates (2) • • • • • •
Material certificates (2) • • • • • •
Wooden packing case • • • • • •
SPM (Shock Pulse Measurement) monitoring • • • • • std
(I)MD dryer bypass (3) • • • • std std
PDP (Pressure Dew-Point) sensor behind (I)MD (3) • • • • • •
(1) MV = Medium Voltage (= above 2130 V AC) / LV = Low Voltage (2) Fixed content (3) On Full Feature units or units with free-standing MD
Technical data
 True performance
Atlas Copco Z-compressors are measured according to ISO Reference conditions

(1) Reference conditions:
1217, Annex C, Edition 3, stipulating the FAD (Free Air Delivery)
- Dry air
measurement at the outlet of the package, net of all losses. - Absolute inlet pressure 1 bar(a)
- Cooling and air intake temperature 20 °C
- Nominal working pressure:
Atlas Copco specifications correspond to the capacity and pres- • 7 bar(e) for 7, 7.5 and 8.6 bar(e) variants
sure that are effectively available to the user, not to the air vol- • 9 bar(e) for 10 and 10.4 bar(e) variants
• 12 bar(e) for 13 bar(e) variants
ume that is sucked in. Differences can be substantial. - Z VSD: 5 % derating for 380V nets
- Capacity of the compressor package measured according to ISO 1217,
Third Edition, Annex C
(2) Cooling water temp. rise of 15 °C (10 °C for FF)
Intake volume (3) Pressure dewpoint is specified for

- 20 °C cooling air/water temperature
- relative humidity of 60 %
Site - nominal working pressure
conditions - load level of minimum 50 %
FAD (4) ± 3 dB(A) according to ISO 2151:2004 and using ISO 9614-2
Conversions
External leakages - 1 kg = 2.2 lbs
- 1 mm = 0.039 inch
- °F = °C x 9/5 + 32 B
C
A
 ZR 110-750 and ZR 132-900 VSD compressors - 50 Hz
ZR Free air delivery (1) Installed Cooling Pressure Sound pressure Weight Dimensions
watercooled motor water dewpoint level (4)
consump- (3)
tion (2)
w/o duct with duct A B C

Type l/s m3/min cfm kW l/s °C dB(A) dB(A) kg mm mm mm
50 Hz - 7.5 bar(e)
ZR 110 318 19.1 674 110 3.5 -28 70 68 3265 3440 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZR 132 367 22.0 778 132 4.1 -29 70 68 3390 3440 2000 1650
ZR 145 394 23.6 835 145 4.2 -30 70 68 3530 3440 2000 1650
ZR 160 471 28.3 998 160 4.4 -25 67 66 4705 4340 2000 1650
ZR 200 607 36.4 1286 200 5.1 -25 67 66 5365 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 726 43.6 1538 250 5.8 -28 67 66 5360 4340 2000 1650
ZR 275 780 46.8 1653 275 6.2 -30 67 66 5560 4340 2000 1650
ZR 110 318 19.1 674 110 1.7 - 67 65 2635 2540 2000 1650
ZR 132 367 22.0 778 132 1.9 - 67 65 2760 2540 2000 1650
ZR 145 394 23.6 835 145 2.0 - 67 66 2900 2540 2000 1650
ZR 160 471 28.3 998 160 2.3 - 67 66 3795 3140 2000 1650
ZR 200 607 36.4 1286 200 3.0 - 67 66 3995 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 726 43.6 1538 250 3.7 - 67 66 3990 3140 2000 1650
Pack (w/o IMD Dryer)
ZR 275 780 46.8 1653 275 4.1 - 67 66 4190 3140 2000 1650
ZR 300 775 46.5 1642 315 4.0 - 70 69 6650 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 855 51.3 1812 315 4.4 - 71 69 6650 3700 2400 2120
ZR 355 949 56.9 2011 355 4.8 - 71 69 6950 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 1049 62.9 2223 400 5.4 - 71 70 7050 3700 2400 2120
ZR 425 1162 69.7 2462 450 6.2 - 72 70 7250 3700 2400 2120
ZR 450 1257 75.4 2663 450 7.2 - 73 71 9500 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 1387 83.2 2939 500 7.8 - 73 71 9500 4060 2400 2120
ZR 630 1726 103.6 3657 630 9.4 - 75 73 10225 4060 2400 2120
ZR 750 2075 124.5 4397 750 11.3 - 75 73 10325 4060 2400 2120
consump- (3)
tion (2)

Type l/s m3/min cfm kW l/s °C dB(A) dB(A) kg mm mm mm
50 Hz - 8.6 bar(e)
ZR 110 285 17.1 604 110 3.1 -28 70 68 3265 3440 2000 1650
ZR 132 326 19.6 691 132 3.5 -29 70 68 3390 3440 2000 1650
ZR 132 VSD 372 22.3 778 132 3.9 -28/-32 68-72 66-69 3500 3440 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZR 145 362 21.7 767 145 3.9 -30 70 68 3530 3440 2000 1650
ZR 160 435 26.1 922 160 4.2 -25 67 66 4705 4340 2000 1650
ZR 160 VSD 431 25.9 913 160 4.2 -28/-32 68-74 66-71 3500 3440 2000 1650
ZR 200 553 33.2 1172 200 4.8 -25 67 66 5365 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 691 41.5 1464 250 5.6 -28 67 66 5360 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 VSD 721 43.3 1528 250 5.8 -25/-30 63-73 62-71 6080 4340 2000 1650
ZR 275 723 43.4 1532 275 5.8 -30 67 66 5560 4340 2000 1650
ZR 315 VSD 836 50.2 1771 299 6.8 -25/-30 63-73 62-71 6080 4340 2000 1650
ZR 110 285 17.1 604 110 1.5 - 67 65 2635 2540 2000 1650
ZR 132 326 19.6 691 132 1.7 - 67 65 2760 2540 2000 1650
ZR 132 VSD 376 22.6 797 132 1.9 - 62-68 61-66 2870 2540 2000 1650
ZR 145 362 21.7 767 145 1.9 - 67 66 2900 2540 2000 1650
ZR 160 435 26.1 922 160 2.2 - 67 66 3795 3140 2000 1650
ZR 160 VSD 436 26.1 922 160 2.2 - 62-70 61-66 2870 2540 2000 1650
ZR 200 553 33.2 1172 200 2.8 - 67 66 3995 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 691 41.5 1464 250 3.5 - 67 66 3990 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 VSD 721 43.3 1528 250 3.7 - 63-73 62-71 4710 3140 2000 1650
ZR 275 723 43.4 1532 275 3.8 - 67 66 4190 3140 2000 1650
ZR 300 723 43.4 1532 315 4.1 - 71 70 6650 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 798 47.9 1691 315 4.5 - 72 70 6650 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 VSD 836 50.2 1771 299 4.3 - 63-73 62-71 4710 3140 2000 1650
ZR 355 886 53.2 1877 355 4.9 - 72 72 6950 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 978 58.7 2072 400 5.4 - 72 71 7050 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 VSD 1114 66.9 2361 425 6.4 - 68-75 66-73 8350 4060 2470 2120
ZR 425 1081 64.9 2291 450 6.2 - 73 71 7250 3700 2400 2120
ZR 450 1166 70.0 2471 450 7.1 - 74 72 9500 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 1291 77.5 2735 500 7.7 - 74 72 9500 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 VSD 1318 79.1 2793 525 7.6 - 68-76 66-74 8350 4060 2470 2120
ZR 630 1602 96.1 3394 630 9.3 - 76 74 10225 4060 2400 2120
ZR 700 VSD 2063 123.8 4371 700 11.6 - 70-78 68-76 11850 4675 2470 2120
ZR 750 1850 111.0 3920 750 10.7 - 76 74 10325 4060 2400 2120
ZR 900 VSD 2456 147.4 5204 935 13.2 - 68-78 68-76 11850 4675 2470 2120
50 Hz - 10 bar(e)
ZR 110 265 15.9 562 110 3.3 -28 70 68 3265 3440 2000 1650
ZR 132 313 18.8 663 132 3.8 -29 70 68 3390 3440 2000 1650
ZR 132 VSD 330 19.8 699 132 4.1 0,875 68-72 66-69 3500 3440 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZR 145 334 20.0 708 145 4.1 -30 70 68 3530 3440 2000 1650
ZR 160 402 24.1 852 160 4.3 -25 67 66 4705 4340 2000 1650
ZR 160 VSD 392 23.5 831 160 4.4 0,875 68-74 66-71 3500 3440 2000 1650
ZR 200 504 30.2 1068 200 4.9 -25 67 66 4905 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 629 37.7 1333 250 5.6 -28 67 66 5360 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 VSD 648 38.9 1373 250 5.8 -25/-30 67-73 65-71 6080 4340 2000 1650
ZR 275 689 41.3 1460 275 6.0 -30 67 66 5560 4340 2000 1650
ZR 315 VSD 746 44.8 1581 299 6.7 -25/-30 67-73 65-71 6080 4340 2000 1650
ZR 110 265 15.9 562 110 1.6 - 67 65 2380 2540 2000 1650
ZR 132 313 18.8 663 132 1.8 - 67 65 2440 2540 2000 1650
ZR 132 VSD 333 20.0 706 132 1.9 - 62-68 61-66 2590 2540 2000 1650
ZR 145 334 20.0 708 145 1.9 - 67 66 2580 2540 2000 1650
ZR 160 402 24.1 852 160 2.3 - 67 66 3795 3140 2000 1650
ZR 160 VSD 394 23.6 835 160 2.1 - 62-70 61-66 2590 2540 2000 1650
ZR 200 504 30.2 1068 200 2.9 - 67 66 3995 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 629 37.7 1333 250 3.6 - 67 66 3990 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 VSD 648 38.9 1373 250 3.7 - 64-70 65-68 4710 3140 2000 1650
ZR 275 689 41.3 1460 275 4.0 - 67 66 4190 3140 2000 1650
ZR 300 689 41.3 1460 315 4.2 - 71 70 6650 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 765 45.9 1621 315 4.5 - 72 70 6650 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 VSD 746 44.8 1581 299 4.3 - 63-73 62-71 4710 3140 2000 1650
ZR 355 846 50.8 1793 355 4.9 - 73 71 6950 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 939 56.3 1990 400 5.4 - 73 71 7050 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 VSD 979 58.7 2074 425 5.7 - 69-76 66-73 8350 4060 2470 2120
ZR 450 1047 62.8 2218 450 7.1 - 74 72 9500 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 1199 71.9 2541 500 7.9 - 74 72 9500 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 VSD 1150 69.0 2437 525 7.6 - 69-77 66-74 8350 4060 2470 2120
ZR 630 1474 88.4 3123 630 9.3 - 76 74 10225 4060 2400 2120
ZR 700 VSD 1859 111.5 3939 700 11.4 - 70-78 68-76 11850 4675 2470 2120
ZR 750 1704 102.2 3611 750 10.5 - 76 74 10325 4060 2400 2120
ZR 900 VSD 2057 123.4 4359 935 12.5 - 68-79 68-77 11850 4675 2470 2120
50 Hz - 13 bar(e)
ZR 145 297 17.8 629 145 4.2 -30 75 72 3530 3440 2000 1650
Pack (w/o IMD) FF (with IMD)
ZR 250 505 30.3 1070 250 5.4 -28 72 70 5360 4340 2000 1650
ZR 275 550 33.0 1165 275 5.7 -30 72 70 5560 4340 2000 1650
ZR 145 297 17.8 629 145 2.0 - 75 72 2900 2540 2000 1650
ZR 250 505 30.3 1070 250 3.4 - 72 70 3990 3140 2000 1650
ZR 275 551 33.1 1168 275 3.7 - 72 70 4190 3140 2000 1650
 ZR 110-750 and ZR 132-900 VSD compressors - 60 Hz
consump- (3)
tion (2)
Type l/s m3/min cfm HP l/s °C dB(A) dB(A) kg mm mm mm
60 Hz - 7 bar(e)
ZR 110 352 21.1 746 150 3.9 -28 70 68 3265 3440 2000 1650
Pack (w/o IMD Dryer) FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZR 160 463 27.8 981 200 4.4 -25 67 66 4695 4340 2000 1650
ZR 200 574 34.4 1216 250 4.9 -25 67 66 5305 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 667 40.0 1413 300 5.4 -28 67 66 5515 4340 2000 1650
ZR 275 752 45.1 1593 350 5.9 -30 67 66 5635 4340 2000 1650
ZR 110 352 21.1 746 150 1.9 - 67 65 2635 2540 2000 1650
ZR 160 463 27.8 981 200 2.3 - 67 66 3785 3140 2000 1650
ZR 200 574 34.4 1216 250 2.9 - 67 66 3935 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 667 40.0 1413 300 3.4 - 67 66 4145 3140 2000 1650
ZR 275 752 45.1 1593 350 3.8 - 67 66 4265 3140 2000 1650
60 Hz - 8.6 bar(e)
ZR 110 321 19.3 679 150 3.8 -28 70 68 3265 3440 2000 1650
ZR 132 VSD 372 22.3 778 175 3.9 -28/-32 68-72 66-69 3500 3440 2000 1650
ZR 145 398 23.9 843 200 4.1 -30 70 68 3530 3440 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZR 160 419 25.1 888 200 4.4 -25 67 66 4695 4340 2000 1650
ZR 160 VSD 431 25.9 913 215 4.2 -28/-32 68-74 66-71 3500 3440 2000 1650
ZR 200 516 31.0 1093 250 4.6 -25 67 66 5305 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 619 37.1 1312 300 5.2 -28 67 66 5515 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 VSD 721 43.3 1528 335 5.8 -25/-30 63-73 62-71 6080 4340 2000 1650
ZR 275 726 43.6 1538 350 5.8 -30 67 66 5635 4340 2000 1650
ZR 315 VSD 836 50.2 1771 400 6.8 -25/-30 63-73 62-71 6080 4340 2000 1650
ZR 110 321 19.3 679 150 1.7 - 67 65 2635 2540 2000 1650
ZR 132 VSD 376 22.6 797 175 1.9 - 62-68 61-66 2870 2540 2000 1650
ZR 145 398 23.9 843 200 2.1 - 68 66 2900 2540 2000 1650
ZR 160 419 25.1 888 200 2.1 - 67 66 3785 3140 2000 1650
ZR 160 VSD 436 26.1 922 215 2.2 - 62-70 61-66 2870 2540 2000 1650
ZR 200 516 31.0 1093 250 2.6 - 67 66 3935 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 619 37.1 1312 300 3.1 - 67 66 4145 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 VSD 721 43.3 1528 335 3.7 - 63-73 62-71 4710 3140 2000 1650
ZR 275 726 43.6 1538 350 3.7 - 67 66 4265 3140 2000 1650
ZR 300 755 45.3 1600 350 4.1 - 71 70 6550 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 850 51.0 1801 400 4.6 - 72 70 6550 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 VSD 836 50.2 1771 400 4.3 - 63-73 62-71 4710 3140 2000 1650
ZR 355 955 57.3 2024 450 5.1 - 72 70 6950 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 1043 62.6 2210 500 5.6 - 72 71 7050 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 VSD 1114 66.9 2361 570 6.4 - 68-75 66-73 8320 4060 2470 2120
ZR 450 1306 78.4 2767 600 7.8 - 74 72 9300 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 1538 92.3 3259 700 8.9 - 74 72 9500 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 VSD 1318 79.1 2793 703 7.6 - 68-76 66-74 8320 4060 2470 2120
ZR 630 1700 102.0 3602 800 9.9 - 76 74 10225 4060 2400 2120
ZR 700 VSD 2063 123.8 4371 938 11.6 - 70-78 68-76 11850 4675 2470 2120
ZR 750 1939 116.3 4109 900 11.2 - 76 74 10225 4060 2400 2120
ZR 900 VSD 2456 147.4 5204 1253 13.2 - 68-78 68-76 11850 4675 2470 2120
consump- (3)
tion (2)
Type l/s m3/min cfm HP l/s °C dB(A) dB(A) kg mm mm mm
60 Hz - 10.4 bar(e)
ZR 110 287 17.2 608 150 3.5 -28 70 68 3265 3440 2000 1650
ZR 132 VSD 330 19.8 699 175 3.9 -28/-32 68-72 66-69 3500 3440 2000 1650
ZR 145 336 20.2 712 200 4.1 -30 70 68 3530 3440 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZR 160 375 22.5 795 200 4.4 -25 67 66 4695 4340 2000 1650
ZR 160 VSD 392 23.5 831 215 4.2 -28/-32 68-74 66-71 3500 3440 2000 1650
ZR 200 459 27.5 973 250 4.7 -25 67 66 4845 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 548 32.9 1161 300 5.2 -28 67 66 5515 4340 2000 1650
ZR 250 VSD 648 38.9 1373 335 5.8 -25/-30 67-73 65-71 6080 4340 2000 1650
ZR 275 641 38.5 1358 350 5.7 -30 67 66 5635 4340 2000 1650
ZR 315 VSD 746 44.8 1581 400 6.7 -25/-30 67-73 65-71 6080 4340 2000 1650
ZR 110 287 17.2 608 150 1.7 - 67 65 2635 2540 2000 1650
ZR 132 VSD 333 20.0 706 214 1.9 - 62-68 61-66 2590 2540 2000 1650
ZR 145 336 20.2 712 200 2.0 - 67 66 2900 2540 2000 1650
ZR 160 375 22.5 795 200 2.2 - 67 66 3785 3140 2000 1650
ZR 160 VSD 394 23.6 835 215 2.1 - 62-70 61-66 2590 2540 2000 1650
ZR 200 459 27.5 973 250 2.6 - 67 66 3935 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 548 32.9 1161 300 3.1 - 67 66 4145 3140 2000 1650
ZR 250 VSD 648 38.9 1373 335 3.7 - 64-70 65-68 4710 3140 2000 1650
ZR 275 641 38.5 1358 350 3.6 - 67 66 4265 3140 2000 1650
ZR 300 677 40.6 1434 350 4.3 - 71 70 6550 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 762 45.7 1615 400 4.6 - 72 70 6550 3700 2400 2120
ZR 315 VSD 746 44.8 1581 400 4.3 - 63-73 62-71 4710 3140 2000 1650
ZR 355 858 51.5 1818 450 5.1 - 73 71 6950 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 945 56.7 2002 500 5.5 - 73 71 7050 3700 2400 2120
ZR 400 VSD 979 58.7 2074 570 5.7 - 69-76 66-73 8350 4060 2470 2120
ZR 450 1144 68.6 2424 600 7.7 - 74 xx 9300 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 1332 79.9 2822 700 8.7 - 75 xx 9500 4060 2400 2120
ZR 500 VSD 1150 69.0 2437 703 7.6 - 69-77 66-74 8350 4060 2470 2120
ZR 630 1474 88.4 3123 800 9.4 - 76 74 10225 4060 2400 2120
ZR 700 VSD 1859 111.5 3939 938 11.4 - 70-78 68-76 11850 4675 2470 2120
ZR 750 1739 104.3 3685 900 10.8 - 76 74 10225 4060 2400 2120
ZR 900 VSD 2057 123.4 4359 1253 12.5 - 68-79 68-77 11850 4675 2470 2120
60 Hz - 13 bar(e)
ZR 145 299 17.9 634 200 4.3 -28 75 72 3530 3440 2000 1650
(with IMD Dryer)
ZR 250 491 29.5 1040 300 5.4 -28 72 70 5515 4340 2000 1650
FF
ZR 275 550 33.0 1165 350 5.8 -30 72 70 5635 4340 2000 1650
ZR 145 299 17.9 634 200 2.0 - 75 72 2900 2540 2000 1650
(w/o IMD Dryer)
ZR 250 491 29.5 1040 300 3.4 - 72 70 4145 3140 2000 1650
Pack
ZR 275 550 33.0 1165 350 3.8 - 72 70 4265 3140 2000 1650
(1) Reference conditions:

- Dry air (3) Pressure dewpoint is specified for
- Absolute inlet pressure 1 bar(a) - 20 °C cooling air/water temperature
- Cooling and air intake temperature 20 °C - relative humidity of 60 %
- Nominal working pressure: - nominal working pressure
• 7 bar(e) for 7, 7.5 and 8.6 bar(e) variants - load level of minimum 50 %
• 9 bar(e) for 10 and 10.4 bar(e) variants
• 12 bar(e) for 13 bar(e) variants (4) ± 3 dB(A) according to ISO 2151:2004 and using ISO 9614-2
- Z VSD: 5 % derating for 380V nets
- Capacity of the compressor package measured according to ISO 1217, Conversions
Third Edition, Annex C - 1 kg = 2.2 lbs
- 1 mm = 0.039 inch
(2) Cooling water temp. rise of 15 °C (10 °C for FF) - °F = °C x 9/5 + 32 B
C
A
 ZT 110-275 and ZT 132-315 VSD compressors - 50 Hz
ZT110-10HAT
ZT aircooled Free air delivery (1) Installed Installed Pressure Sound pressure Weight Dimensions
motor fan dewpoint level (4)
motor (3)

Type l/s m3/min cfm kW kW °C dB(A) dB(A) kg mm mm mm
50 Hz - 7.5 bar(e)
ZT 110 312 18.7 661 110 4.8 -28 72 70 4095 4040 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZT 132 360 21.6 763 132 4.8 -29 73 70 4220 4040 2000 1650
ZT 145 390 23.4 826 145 4.8 -30 73 71 4360 4040 2000 1650
ZT 160 460 27.57 973 160 8.8 -30 77 75 5625 5040 2100 1650
ZT 200 563 33.75 1191 200 8.8 -25 77 75 6285 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 705 42.31 1493 250 8.8 -28 77 75 6280 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 740 44.38 1566 315 18.5 -30 77 75 6630 5040 2100 1650
ZT 110 314 18.8 665 110 4.8 - 71 70 3585 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 362 21.7 767 132 4.8 - 72 70 3710 4040 2000 1650
ZT 145 392 23.5 829 145 4.8 - 72 70 3850 4040 2000 1650
ZT 160 460 27.6 973 160 8.8 - 77 75 5185 5040 2100 1650
ZT 200 563 33.8 1191 200 8.8 - 77 75 5385 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 705 42.3 1493 250 8.8 - 77 75 5380 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 740 44.4 1566 275 8.8 - 77 75 5580 5040 2100 1650
50 Hz - 8.6 bar(e)
ZT 110 281 16.9 595 110 4.8 -28 72 70 4095 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 322 19.3 682 132 4.8 -29 73 70 4220 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 VSD 349 20.9 739 132 4.8 -25/-30 67-71 66-70 4330 4040 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZT 145 361 21.6 785 145 4.8 -30 73 71 4360 4040 2000 1650
ZT 160 422 25.3 894 160 8.8 -30 77 75 5625 5040 2100 1650
ZT 160 VSD 404 24.2 856 160 4.8 -25/-30 67-74 66-71 4330 4040 2000 1650
ZT 200 510 30.6 1081 200 8.8 -25 77 75 6285 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 661 39.7 1401 250 8.8 -28 77 75 6280 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 VSD 699 41.9 1480 250 18.5 -25/-30 70-77 68-75 6660 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 696 41.8 1475 275 18.5 -30 77 75 6630 5040 2100 1650
ZT 315 VSD 789 47.4 1672 299 18.5 -25/-30 70-78 68-76 6660 5040 2100 1650
ZT 110 281 16.9 595 110 4.8 - 71 70 3585 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 322 19.3 682 132 4.8 - 72 70 3710 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 VSD 354 21.2 750 132 4.8 - 67-74 66-71 3820 4040 2000 1650
ZT 145 361 21.6 785 145 4.8 - 72 70 3850 4040 2000 1650
ZT 160 422 25.3 894 160 8.8 - 77 75 5185 5040 2100 1650
ZT 160 VSD 410 24.6 869 160 4.8 - 67-74 66-71 3820 4040 2000 1650
ZT 200 510 30.6 1081 200 8.8 - 77 75 5385 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 661 39.7 1401 250 8.8 - 77 75 5380 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 VSD 699 41.9 1480 250 8.8 - 70-77 68-75 6130 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 696 41.8 1475 275 8.8 - 77 75 5580 5040 2100 1650
ZT 315 VSD 789 47.4 1672 299 8.8 - 70-78 68-76 6130 5040 2100 1650
50 Hz - 10 bar(e)
ZT 110 260 15.6 551 110 4.8 -28 72 70 4095 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 313 18.8 662 132 4.8 -29 73 70 4220 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 VSD 316 19.0 670 132 4.8 -25/-30 67-71 66-70 4330 4040 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZT 145 334 20.0 707 145 4.8 -30 73 70 4360 4040 2000 1650
ZT 160 389 23.3 823 160 8.8 -30 78 76 5625 5040 2100 1650
ZT 160 VSD 370 22.2 784 160 4.8 -25/-30 67-74 66-71 4330 4040 2000 1650
ZT 200 490 29.4 1038 200 8.8 -30 78 76 5825 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 608 36.5 1287 250 8.8 -28 78 76 6280 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 VSD 622 37.3 1316 250 18.5 -25/-30 71-78 69-76 6660 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 671 40.2 1420 275 18.5 -30 78 76 6630 5040 2100 1650
ZT 315 VSD 709 42.5 1501 299 18.5 -25/-30 71-79 69-77 6660 5040 2100 1650
ZT 110 261 15.7 553 110 4.8 - 71 70 3560 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 314 18.8 665 132 4.8 - 72 70 3700 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 VSD 320 19.2 678 132 4.8 - 67-71 66-70 4050 4040 2000 1650
ZT 145 336 20.1 711 145 4.8 - 72 70 3850 4040 2000 1650
ZT 160 389 23.3 823 160 8.8 - 78 76 5185 5040 2100 1650
ZT 160 VSD 384 23.0 814 160 4.8 - 67-74 66-71 4050 4040 2000 1650
ZT 200 490 29.4 1038 200 8.8 - 78 76 5385 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 608 36.5 1287 250 8.8 - 78 76 5380 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 VSD 622 37.3 1316 250 8.8 - 71-78 69-76 6130 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 671 40.2 1420 275 8.8 - 78 76 5580 5040 2100 1650
ZT 315 VSD 709 42.5 1501 299 8.8 - 71-79 69-77 6130 5040 2100 1650
 ZT 110-275 and ZT 132-315 VSD compressors - 60 Hz
ZT aircooled Free air delivery (1) Installed Installed Pressure Sound pressure Weight Dimensions
motor fan dewpoint level (4)
motor (3)

Type l/s m3/min cfm HP HP °C dB(A) dB(A) kg mm mm mm
60 Hz - 8.6 bar(e)
ZT 110 315 18.9 667 150 6.5 -28 72 70 4095 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 VSD 349 20.9 739 175 6.5 -25/-30 67-71 66-70 4330 4040 2000 1650
ZT 145 391 23.5 828 200 6.5 -30 73 70 4360 4040 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZT 160 416 25.0 881 200 12.3 -30 77 75 5615 5040 2100 1650
ZT 160 VSD 404 24.2 856 215 6.5 -25/-30 67-74 66-71 4330 4040 2000 1650
ZT 200 510 30.6 180 250 12.3 -25 77 75 6225 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 608 36.5 1287 300 12.3 -28 77 75 6435 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 VSD 699 41.9 1480 335 24.8 -25/-30 70-77 68-75 6660 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 713 42.8 1509 350 24.8 -30 77 75 6705 5040 2100 1650
ZT 315 VSD 789 47.4 1672 400 24.8 -25/-30 70-78 68-76 6660 5040 2100 1650
ZT 110 317 19.0 671 150 6.5 - 71 70 3585 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 VSD 354 21.2 750 175 6.5 - 67-74 66-71 3820 4040 2000 1650
ZT 145 392 23.5 831 200 6.5 - 72 70 3850 4040 2000 1650
ZT 160 416 25.0 881 200 12.3 - 77 75 5175 5040 2100 1650
ZT 160 VSD 410 24.6 869 215 6.5 - 67-74 66-71 3820 4040 2000 1650
ZT 200 510 30.6 1280 250 12.3 - 77 75 5325 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 608 36.5 1287 300 12.3 - 77 75 5535 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 VSD 699 41.9 1480 335 12.3 - 70-77 68-75 6130 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 713 42.8 1509 350 12.3 - 77 75 5655 5040 2100 1650
ZT 315 VSD 789 47.4 1672 400 12.3 - 70-78 68-76 6130 5040 2100 1650
60 Hz - 10.4 bar(e)
ZT 110 282 16.9 598 150 6.5 -28 72 70 4095 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 VSD 316 19.0 670 175 6.5 -25/-30 67-71 66-70 4330 4040 2000 1650
ZT 145 329 19.7 697 200 6.5 -30 73 70 4360 4040 2000 1650
FF (with IMD Dryer)
ZT 160 359 21.5 761 200 12.3 -30 78 76 5615 5040 2100 1650
ZT 160 VSD 370 22.2 784 215 6.5 -25/-30 67-74 66-71 4330 4040 2000 1650
ZT 200 438 26.3 928 250 12.3 -30 78 76 5765 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 526 31.6 1115 300 12.3 -28 78 76 6435 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 VSD 622 37.3 1316 335 24.8 -25/-30 71-78 69-76 6660 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 616 37.0 1305 350 24.8 -30 78 76 6705 5040 2100 1650
ZT 315 VSD 709 42.5 1501 400 24.8 -25/-30 71-79 69-77 6660 5040 2100 1650
ZT 110 283 17.0 600 150 6.5 - 71 70 3585 4040 2000 1650
ZT 132 VSD 320 19.2 678 175 6.5 - 67-71 66-70 4050 4040 2000 1650
ZT 145 331 19.9 701 200 6.5 - 72 70 3850 4040 2000 1650
ZT 160 359 21.5 761 200 12.3 - 78 76 5175 5040 2100 1650
ZT 160 VSD 384 23.0 814 215 6.5 - 67-74 66-71 4050 4040 2000 1650
ZT 200 438 26.3 928 250 12.3 - 78 76 5325 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 526 31.6 1115 300 12.3 - 78 76 5535 5040 2100 1650
ZT 250 VSD 622 37.3 1316 335 12.3 - 71-78 69-76 6130 5040 2100 1650
ZT 275 616 37.0 1305 350 12.3 - 78 76 5655 5040 2100 1650
ZT 315 VSD 709 42.5 1501 400 12.3 - 71-79 69-77 6130 5040 2100 1650
(1) Reference conditions: (3) Pressure dewpoint is specified for

- Dry air - 20 °C cooling air/water temperature
- Absolute inlet pressure 1 bar(a) - relative humidity of 60 %
- Cooling and air intake temperature 20 °C - nominal working pressure
- Nominal working pressure: - load level of minimum 50 %
• 7 bar(e) for 7, 7.5 and 8.6 bar(e) variants
• 9 bar(e) for 10 and 10.4 bar(e) variants (4) ± 3 dB(A) according to ISO 2151:2004 and using ISO 9614-2
- Z VSD: 5 % derating for 380V nets
- Capacity of the compressor package measured according to ISO 1217, Conversions
Third Edition, Annex C - 1 kg = 2.2 lbs
- 1 mm = 0.039 inch
(2) Cooling water temp. rise of 15 °C (10 °C for FF) - °F = °C x 9/5 + 32
B
C
A
What sets Atlas Copco apart as a company is
our conviction that we can only excel in what we do,
if we provide the best possible know-how and technology
to really help our customers produce, grow and succeed.
There is a unique way of achieving that - we simply call it
the Atlas Copco way. It builds on interaction, on long-term
relationships and involvement in the customers' process,
needs and objectives. It means having the flexibility to adapt
ISO 9001
A consistent quality earned to the diverse demands of the people we cater for.
us the industry’s leadership
and the customer’s trust. It's the commitment to our customers' business that
drives our effort towards increasing their productivity
through better solutions. It starts with fully supporting
existing products and continuously doing things better,
but it goes much further, creating advances in technology
through innovation. Not for the sake of technology, but for
the sake of our customer's bottom line and peace-of-mind.
ISO 14001
Atlas Copco’s That is how Atlas Copco will strive to remain the
Environmental Management
System forms an integral part first choice, to succeed in attracting new business and to
of each business process.
maintain our position as the industry leader.
2935 0538 11 - Printed in Belgium - Subject to alterations without prior notice
Never use compressed

air as breathing air
without prior purification
in accordance with
local legislation and
standards.
www.atlascopco.com
Product Data: ZT110145.WB1
Page: 1 of 2
Effective: 10/1/97
ZT110/145 Series
Two Staged Oil-Free ZT110-10
Air Cooled
MODEL ZT110-8.6 ZT145-8.6 ZT110-10.0 ZT145-10.0

Compressor Speed rpm 3570 3570 3570 3570
Maximum Pressure psig 125 125 150 150
Minimum Pressure psig 60 60 60 60
Maximum Ratio 10.0:1 10.0:1 12.0:1 12.0:1
Number of Stages 2 2 2 2
Flow Capacity (FAD)

@ 150 psig CFM --- --- 574 674
@ 145 psig CFM --- --- 576 676
@ 135 psig CFM --- --- 578 680
@ 125 psig CFM 642 805 581 682
@ 115 psig CFM 644 809 583 684
@ 100 psig CFM 646 812 585 687
@ 85 psig CFM 648 814 587 689
@ 60 psig CFM 653 818 589 693
Shaft BHP Power Input*

@ 150 psig Bhp --- --- 163.6 193.2
@ 145 psig Bhp --- --- 159.6 187.8
@ 135 psig Bhp --- --- 154.3 181.1
@ 125 psig Bhp 163.6 211.9 148.9 174.4
@ 115 psig Bhp 158.3 203.9 143.5 167.7
@ 100 psig Bhp 148.9 191.8 132.8 156.9
@ 85 psig Bhp 139.5 181.1 124.8 147.6
@ 60 psig Bhp 124.8 162.3 111.3 131.5
@ Unloaded Bhp 25.5 30.8 22.8 26.8
*Excludes Cooling Fan Power Bhp 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0
Specific Power Consumption

@ 150 psig Bhp/100 CFM --- --- 28.5 28.7
@ 145 psig Bhp/100 CFM --- --- 27.7 27.8
@ 135 psig Bhp/100 CFM --- --- 26.7 26.6
@ 125 psig Bhp/100 CFM 25.5 26.3 25.6 25.6
@ 115 psig Bhp/100 CFM 24.6 25.2 24.6 24.5
@ 100 psig Bhp/100 CFM 23.0 23.6 22.7 22.9
@ 85 psig Bhp/100 CFM 21.5 22.3 21.3 21.4
@ 60 psig Bhp/100 CFM 19.1 19.8 18.9 19.0
Standard Operating Conditions: Ambient Pressure 14.5 psia

Ambient Temperature 80 deg. F.
Relative Humidity 0%
Performance Guarantee: Unit performance complies with PNEUROP/CAGI PN2CPTC2

+/-4% for capacity and +/-5% for specific power.
Product Data: ZT110145.WB1
Page: 2 of 2
Effective: 10/1/97
ZT110/145 Series
Two Staged Oil-Free
Air Cooled
MODEL ZT110-8.6 ZT145-8.6 ZT110-10.0 ZT145-10.0

Maximum Standard Operating Limits
Ambient Temperature deg. F 113 113 113 113
Cooling Duct Restrictions
Suction~ (ins. W.C.) -0.12 -0.12 -0.12 -0.12
Outlet~ (ins. W.C.) +0.12 +0.12 +0.12 +0.12
Operating Data
LP Male Rotor rpm 12170 14955 11116 12835
LP Female Rotor rpm 8113 9970 7411 8557
HP Male Rotor rpm 21419 25152 18742 21563
HP Female Rotor rpm 14279 16768 12495 14375
LP Male Rotor Tip Speed ft/s 291 357 266 307
LP Female Rotor Tip Speed ft/s 167 206 153 176
HP Male Rotor Tip Speed ft/s 309 363 271 311
HP Female Rotor Tip Speed ft/s 184 216 161 185
Sound Level with Enclosure dB(A) 78 78 78 78
Aftercooler Approach Temp. deg. F 14.4 16.2 14.4 16.2
Cooling Air
Cooling Air Flow Requirement CFM 11,652 11,652 11,652 11,652
Heat Rejection @ 100 Psig (BTU/Hr) 383,860 500,807 340,004 405,788
Physical Data
Air Inlet (L x W) in. 41 x 10 41 x 10 41 x 10 41 x 10
Cooling Air Outlet (L x W) in. 49 x 7 49 x 7 49 x 7 49 x 7
Air Discharge Connection 3"-150#RF 3"-150#RF 3"-150#RF 3"-150#RF
Aftercooler Condensate Connections 1/8" NPT 1/8" NPT 1/8" NPT 1/8" NPT
Oil Sump Capacity US gal. 9.2 9.2 9.2 9.2
Length in. 108 108 108 108
Width in. 65 65 65 65
Height in. 106 106 106 106
Approx. Shipping Weight** lbs. 7,718 8,159 7,718 8,159
Recommendations
Air Receiver Volume cu. ft. 57 96 57 96
Typ. Receiver Size (Dia. x Ht.) in. 36 x 96 42 x 120 36 x 96 42 x 120
Motor Data
Power Hp 150 200 150 200
Current(460V) Amp 168 168 168 220
Min. Guaranteed Efficiency % 94.3 94.3 94.3 95.6
Service Factor 1.2 1.15 1.2 1.15
Power Factor 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.9
Enclosure Type TEFC TEFC TEFC TEFC
*Operating Sound Level: Operating sound levels for machines equipped with recommended standard motors and
enclosures are guaranteed +/-3 dB(A) when measured in free field conditions at a 1 meter distance according to CAGI PNEUROP Test Code.
**Recommended Motor Size: Package weight includes Atlas Copco's standard motor size recommended for typical applications.
~Duct Restrictions: Inches water column average static pressure measurement, free of velocity effects taken in the
duct immediately outside the compressor package ventilation grille.
Section 4 A
I
Atlas Copco R
Air Dryer
D
R
Model: Y
AD-300
E
R
Atlas Copco
Heat Regenerative Desiccant Dryer
AD 120-1450
118-1462 l/s / 250-3100 cfm
AD300
AD: A Truly Unique Desiccant Dryer
Atlas Copco AD dryers are heat regenerative desiccant dryers. This means that they operate using two towers: one tower
is always drying compressed air (so it can be distributed to the production floor); the other is always regenerating (prepar-
ing itself so it can dry compressed air). Generally, the towers perform the same function for four hours before switching
from one to the other.
The regeneration process, which is unique to the AD, uses only 7% purge air (50% less than heatless dryers) and provides
uninterrupted dry air to maximize your production efforts. But what makes the AD a truly superior dryer is that it can be
outfitted with Purge Control and EcoPurge – two optional features that provide the most energy-efficient drying system on
the market.
THE RELIABLE CHOICE

Atlas Copco’s AD range is built to last using the latest technology and strongest material components. The design process originates
with the simple goals of increasing reliability and eliminating performance variation in heated regeneration desiccant dryer technology,
which is why the AD incorporates these crucial features:
• bottom-to-top drying
• top-to-bottom purging
• large pipe work to support low pressure drop and long contact time
• two desiccant sizes to avoid potential performance issues
The result is a machine that defines quality and reliability for compressed air drying systems.
HEAT REGENERATIVE DESICCANT DRYER LONG TERM BENEFITS

• Most popular type of desiccant dryer offered in the US
• Low maintenance costs - long lifetime for dryer components
• Low purchase price and quick payback
• Operating costs comparable to a refrigerated dryer
• Immediate energy savings from the first day of installation
• Service intervals every 24,000 hours - much better than
• Energy consumption up to 40% less than competitors’ dryers
industry standards
SUPREME ENERGY EFFICIENCY & COST SAVINGS

With a relatively low initial cost, low maintenance costs and high energy savings, the AD provides a rapid payback. When you purchase
an AD and install it, you will quickly experience how low its direct and indirect energy costs are. In fact, compared to a basic heat regen-
erative desiccant dryer, the AD consumes as much as 40% less energy. The AD also uses less purge air — the compressed air needed
to regenerate the towers — which saves you real dollars considering the cost to produce that compressed air. The AD’s low pressure
drop (as low as 1psi) provides additional savings.
PATENTED ENERGY SAVING OPTION

VALUE BEYOND PRICE
MAKES THE AD TRULY UNIQUE
EcoPurge is Atlas Copco’s unique, patented process of • An energy saving solution for responsible, earth-friendly dryer users
regenerating the cooling towers. EcoPurge produces • Peace of mind from using a machine recognized for performance
immediate and constant energy savings of 50%, even and reliability
under full-load conditions.
AD
AD: Power-Saving Excellence!
Technical specifications & options
AD dryer Inlet capacity Total installed Pressure Drop Inlet/outlet Purge Desiccant/
Optional filtration Dimensions
FAD 7 bar(g) Weight
type power (excluding filters) connections Flow Tower
100psi(g) Pre-filter After-filter H W L
0.01 micron 1 micron
cfm l/s HP kW psi bar cfm lbs 0.01 ppm Inch Inch Inch lbs
AD120 250 118 4.0 3.0 3.0 0.2 1.5” NPT 18 175 PD120 DDp120 84.1 52.2 30.0 980
AD150 300 142 4.0 3.0 3.0 0.2 2.0” NPT 21 215 PD150 DDp150 80.5 58.2 32.0 1260
AD165 350 165 5.4 4.0 3.0 0.2 2.0” NPT 25 250 PD175 DDp175 90.5 58.2 32.0 1410
AD185 400 189 6.7 5.0 3.0 0.2 2.0” NPT 28 285 PD175 DDp175 81.7 58.0 35.0 1530
AD235 500 236 8.0 6.0 3.0 0.2 2.0” NPT 35 355 PD280 DDp280 82.1 60.1 38.0 1820
AD300 650 307 10.1 7.5 3.0 0.2 2.0” NPT 46 450 PD280 DDp280 96.0 62.0 42.0 2100
AD350 750 354 12.1 9.0 3.0 0.2 2.5” ANSI 53 520 PD390 DDp390 99.6 78.4 42.0 3000
AD470 1000 472 14.1 10.5 3.0 0.2 2.5” ANSI 70 725 PD520 DDp520 91.6 79.5 46.0 3350
AD580 1250 590 20.1 15.0 3.0 0.2 3.0” ANSI 86 890 PD780 DDp780 107.2 87.7 46.0 3850
AD700 1500 708 24.1 18.0 3.0 0.2 3.0” ANSI 105 1050 PD780 DDp780 91.2 92.0 52.0 4450
AD850 1800 849 32.2 24.0 3.0 0.2 4.0” ANSI 126 1250 PD1050 DDp1050 108.8 102.0 54.0 4800
AD1000 2100 991 32.2 24.0 3.0 0.2 4.0” ANSI 147 1500 PD1050 DDp1050 98.8 108.0 60.0 5800
AD1225 2600 1226 40.2 30.0 3.0 0.2 4.0” ANSI 182 1800 PD1400 DDp1400 110.8 108.0 60.0 7875
AD1450 3100 1462 46.9 35.0 3.0 0.2 6.0” ANSI 217 2200 PD1400 DDP1400 135.0 110.0 64.0 9230
Reference Conditions*
Maximum compressed air effective inlet pressure 150 psi(g) Minimum ambient air temperature 35°F
Minimum compressed air effective inlet pressure 60 psi(g) Maximum compressed air inlet temperature 113°F
Maximum ambient air temperature 113°F Minimum compressed air inlet temperature 35°F
*For conditions other than reference conditions, please contact Atlas Copco.
OPTIONS
PURGE CONTROL
This feature monitors the pressure dew point (PDP) of the drying tower and will only allow the two towers to switch functions (from drying
to regenerating and vice versa) when the PDP reaches a pre-set level. On competitors’ dryers, the towers will switch after a set period
of time regardless the towers’ actual need to switch. But with Purge Control, the towers only switch when the PDP falls to a specified
level, maximizing your energy efficiency. Plus, during this waiting time, neither purge air nor energy is used, essentially making
your dryer “free” for a period of time.
ECOPURGE
This patented regeneration process is designed to provide 50% energy savings at full-load
conditions by substituting constant-purge for pulse-purge. What does that mean? Eco-
Purge requires less compressed air (purge air) to regenerate the towers than competi-
tors’ dryers. It uses only 7% of the compressed air your compressor produces to fully
regenerate the tower, which is 50% less than a heatless dryer. This process results in
50% less purge flow, which translates into real savings for you.
• INLET AND OUTLET FILTERS COMBINATIONS • STAINLESS STEEL CONTROL TUBING

• FILTER + VALVE BYPASS CONFIGURATIONS • -90°F PDP
• SEVERE DUTY PAINT • MOISTURE INDICATOR

• Z PURGE CLASS FOR CLASS1, DIVISION 2, • CULUS 508A CONTROL PANEL 3
• GROUP A-D APPLICATIONS
• NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL CONTROL CUBICLE
Atlas Copco has a focus on exceeding customer needs with a culture built on ongoing
interaction, long-term relationships, and a commitment to understanding each customer’s
process and objectives. As a result, every compressed air solution we create helps a cus-
tomer operate with greater efficiency, economy, and productivity.
To better serve our customers, we have operations where our customers do business. Our
Eastern, Central, Southern and Western regions each have their own direct Atlas Copco
sales and service team, plus we have a nationwide network of Atlas Copco customer
centers and authorized contracted independent distributors. We have four manufactur-
ing facilities in the USA, including one in Wisconsin, two in Texas, and our state of the art
manufacturing facility, distribution center, parts warehouse, and corporate offices in Rock
Hill, South Carolina.
Satisfying customer needs with ground-breaking integrated compressed air technology,

quality air accessories and 24/7 service support enhanced with remote monitoring tools
positions Atlas Copco as a leading global compressor manufacturer. Our unwavering com-
mitment is to be First in Mind – First in Choice® for all your compressed air requirements.
We are committed to your superior productivity through interaction and innovation.
Central Region
Eastern Region
Atlas Copco Compressors

Western Region Corporate Headquarters
Southern Region SPONSOR
1310 9056 93 FAB 6/09 2M
www.atlascopco.us
866-344-4887
Danger: Compressed air should never be supplied as breathing air unless air
is properly purified for breathing. Atlas Copco assumes no responsibility or
liability related to the purchaser’s/user’s breathing system.
© 2009 Atlas Copco Compressors LLC. All rights reserved. The information contained herein is general in nature and is not intended for
® Atlas Copco is a registered trademark of Atlas Copco AB specific construction, installation or application purposes.
Price Page
AD300
AIR DRYER
Dryer Model: AD-120 Thru AD-300 Heat Reactivated Desiccant Air Dryers ( -40°F and Optional -90°F PDP )
Model AD-120 AD-150 AD-165 AD-185 AD-235 AD-300

Part Numbers 150 psig 8102-1205-03 8102-1205-06 8102-1205-09 8102-1205-12 8102-1205-15 8102-1205-18
• The AD-120 thru AD-300 come standard with one of the most efficient Energy-Saving controls on the market. It is a microprocessor
based - Timer Control which, constantly monitors the PDP in the drying towers and will not switch towers until absolutely necessary. An
additional important feature, is the "Standard" NEMA-4 control panel.
• For more Energy Savings, we can offer the optional "patented" EcoPurge Control function, with hour meter counters to verify and
quantify savings, this control will automatically reduce the purge air flow by 50%. When required, the purge valve will closed, the line
pressure is increased and no purge air is discharged. The heaters remain on and the air is dried to the required PDP. The end result... is a
fully regenerated bed with only half the purge rate. EcoPurge and Purge Contol come with a PDP Digital Readout.
• A -40°F PDP is our standard offering and an Optional -90°F PDP is available as well.
• Oversized Vessels insure low drying air speeds and longer contact time. This also allows for an Abundant Desiccant overfill, which
will counteract aging and improve performance. Bottom to top drying and reverse purge air flow, add to the drying and regeneration
efficiency.
• These vessels are filled with efficiently adsorbing BASF-220 Activated Alumina Desiccant, which uses less reactivation energy than
conventional drying agents. The BASF-220 is also a "high crush" strength product, this yields less dusting and longer life. Our custom
combination 1/4" and 1/8" desiccant fill process, helps eliminate air stream channeling. Channeling reduces dryer efficiency.
• The oversized piping helps maintain Very Low Pressure Drops within the dryer construction for additional Energy-Savings.
• Space-Saving Design is fully integrated, utilizing 50% less area than traditional installations. Furthermore, these units are built with
heavy duty industrial grade frame-work, which includes fork-lift capability and lifting ease. Optional Inlet and Outlet Filters with custom
multi-by-pass features can be engineered and field or pre-mounted as required.
• Other Filter choices are also Available : DD/PD/QD Filters, allow customers the freedom to select the air quality required for their
specific applications.
• Simple Installation & Maintenance with all units being delivered pre-tested and commissioned, so they are ready for immediate use.
Maintenance intervals for desiccant, switching valves, mufflers and filters... in most cases, are twice that of the competition.
• Standard scope of supply includes: Steady PDP @ -40°F, Full status annunciation via standard lamps, plus LED's - digital read outs,
NEMA-4 control cubicle, BASF-220 high crush resistant Activated Alumina desiccant, low Watt density heaters, removable stainless steel
screens, ball valves with stainless steel construction, sintered polymer butterfly valves with Nylon discs and viton seats, mufflers with
integrated relief valves and multiple supply voltage packages available.
• Some additional items for General and/or Optional features with AD Dryers are: NEMA-4X control cubical, failure to switch alarms,
PDP alarm, Heater malfunction alarm, Moisture indicator, sever duty paint or custom surface protection and stainless steel tubing. In
general, tools and pneumatic equipment last longer, air-net piping corrosion is reduced... corrosion which causes "costly" air leaks. Clean,
Dry air results in fewer breakdowns, and less chance of product spoilage, due to moisture contamination.
Model AD 120
AD-120 AD-150
AD 150 AD-165
AD 165 AD 185
AD-185 AD 235
AD-235 AD 300
AD-300
Technical Data
Inlet Capacity
PDP -40°F @ 100 psi scfm 250 300 350 400 500 650
Pressure Drop psi 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Operating Power @ 460v kW 3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.5
Limitations
Max. Air Inlet Pressure
100 psi Variant psi 150 150 150 150 150 150
Min. Air Inlet Pressure
100 psi Variant psi 60 60 60 60 60 60
Max Ambient Temp °F 113 113 113 113 113 113

Min Ambient Temp °F 35 35 35 35 35 35
Max Inlet Temp °F 113 113 113 113 113 113
Min Inlet Temp °F 35 35 35 35 35 35
Dimensions LxWxH Inches 30 x 52 x 84 32 x 58 x 80 32 x 58 x 90 35 x 58 x 82 38 x 60 x 82 42 x 62 x 96

Shipping Weight Lbs 980 1,260 1,410 1,530 1,820 2,100
Connections: NPT
Inlet & Outlet Inches 1/2 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Related Options:
Recommended Pre-Filter PD-120 PD-150 PD-175 PD-175 PD-280 PD-390
Recommended After-Filter DDp-120 DDp-150 DDp-175 DDp-175 DDp-280 DDp-390
Section 5 T
H
E
AKG Thermal R
after Cooler M
A
Model: L
CC600-3
A
F
T
E
R
C
O
O
L
E
R
CC600-3
CC 600 3
CC600-3
370
132
82
0
47
94
589
ROTATION
534
307
M10 x 1.0 x 1d
HELICOIL (8x)
AIR FLOW
1/4" NPT HEX
HEAD PLUG
80
41
25
0 0
2" NPT FITTING (2X)
0
3
42
33
63
388
713
773
776
818
0
19
38
68
708
738
757
776
166
127
13.5 (4X)
12
0
47
94
113
THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY TITLE

Work Pressure 250 OF AKG OF AMERICA. ANY COPYING OR
NOTES: (psi) (Max) TRANSMITTAL WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM
of America, Inc. AKG OF AMERICA IS PROHIBITED
Test Pressure UNLESS OTHERWISE
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED (psi) (Max) 190 Aftercooler Assembly
DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM Paint BLACK SPECIFIED DRWN BY: Nance
PO BOX 370
ALL DIMENSIONS Mebane, NC 27302 DWG. NO. REV.
Customer Part No: CC600-3 ARE REFERENCE DATE: 4/16/09
Phone(919)563-4286 3703.398.0000
Fin System 7318/7101 Fax (919)304-1335 ENGR: Nance -
PAGE: 1 of 2
PRINT DATE: 4/16/2009
6
5
1
3
7 1 8407.112.4103 Leeson Motor 1HP;56C;3PH;1740RPM TEFC

6 1 8400.132.0020 Fan 19.7-10-3L-PPG-30B 5/8" x 3/16", 5/32"
5 1 1872.013.4030 20" Fan Guard
4 4 1 3703.018.0001 Mounting Bracket (Right)
3 1 3703.018.0002 Mounting Bracket (left)
2 1 1872.383.4010 Shroud Assembly
1 1 3703.029.4000 CC600-C Cooler
ITEM QTY. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
NO.
THE INFORMATION HEREON IS THE PROPERTY TITLE
Work Pressure 250 OF AKG OF AMERICA. ANY COPYING OR
(psi) (Max) TRANSMITTAL WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM
of America, Inc. AKG OF AMERICA IS PROHIBITED
Test Pressure UNLESS OTHERWISE
(psi) (Max) 190 Aftercooler Assembly
Paint BLACK SPECIFIED DRWN BY: Nance
PO BOX 370
ALL DIMENSIONS Mebane, NC 27302 DWG. NO. REV.
Customer Part No: CC600-3 ARE REFERENCE DATE: 4/16/09
Phone(919)563-4286 3703.398.0000
Fin System 7318/7101 Fax (919)304-1335 ENGR: Nance -
PAGE: 2 of 2
PRINT DATE: 4/16/2009
P
Section 6 R
E
Pressure & Temperature
S
Instrumentation
Pressure Transmitter S
- INVENSYS -
IDP10-T22C21F-M1L1
U
R
Pressure Transmitter Gauge
- INVENSYS - E
IGP10-T22D1F-L1
Pressure Regulator
- SMC -
&
AR20-N02BE-Z
Pressure Gauge T
- Ashcroft -
35-1009SW-L-02L-0/200 E
Thermometer M
- Trerice -
B836-06-05C 6 In
P
B836-02-05C 2.5 In
Thermowell
- Trerice -
76-3JK
76-4J6 I
N
S
T
Instruction MI IDP10-T
July 2008
IDP10-T22C21F-M1L1
I/A Series® Pressure Transmitters

IDP10 Differential Pressure
with HART Communication
Installation, Operation, Calibration, Configuration, and Maintenance
Contents
Figures.................................................................................................................................................. v
Tables .................................................................................................................................................. vi
1. Introduction..................................................................................................................................... 1
General Description .............................................................................................................................. 1
Reference Documents .......................................................................................................................... 1
Transmitter Identification ...................................................................................................................... 3
Standard Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 5
Product Safety Specifications ............................................................................................................. 10
ATEX and IECEx Warnings ........................................................................................................... 12
ATEX Compliance Documents ...................................................................................................... 12
IECEx Compliance Documents ..................................................................................................... 12
2. Installation..................................................................................................................................... 13
Transmitter Mounting .......................................................................................................................... 13
Process Mounting .......................................................................................................................... 13
Manifold Mounted Transmitter ....................................................................................................... 14
Transmitter Mounted on a Coplanar‰ Manifold ........................................................................... 14
Pipe or Surface Mounting .............................................................................................................. 15
Standard Mounting Bracket ...................................................................................................... 15
Universal Mounting Bracket ..................................................................................................... 17
Venting and Draining .......................................................................................................................... 20
Traditional Structure ...................................................................................................................... 20
LP1 Low Profile Structure .............................................................................................................. 20
LP2 Low Profile Structure .............................................................................................................. 21
Installation of Flow Measurement Piping ............................................................................................ 21
Filling System with Seal Liquid ........................................................................................................... 23
Positioning the Housing ...................................................................................................................... 24
Positioning the Display ....................................................................................................................... 24
Setting the Write Protect Jumper ........................................................................................................ 24
Cover Locks ........................................................................................................................................ 24
Wiring ................................................................................................................................................. 25
Accessing Transmitter Field Terminals ......................................................................................... 25
Wiring the Transmitter to a Control Loop ...................................................................................... 26
Multidrop Communication .............................................................................................................. 29
Connecting the Transmitter to an I/A Series System .................................................................... 30
Putting a Differential Pressure Transmitter Into Operation ................................................................. 30
Taking a Differential Pressure Transmitter Out of Operation ............................................................. 30
3. Operation Via Local Display ........................................................................................................ 31

Entering Numerical Values ................................................................................................................. 32
Reranging ........................................................................................................................................... 32
Viewing the Database ......................................................................................................................... 33
Viewing the Pressure Range .............................................................................................................. 33
Testing the Display ............................................................................................................................. 33
Error Messages ................................................................................................................................ 34
iii
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 Contents
4. Calibration..................................................................................................................................... 35
General Calibration Notes .................................................................................................................. 35
Calibration Setup ................................................................................................................................ 37
Setup of Electronic Equipment ...................................................................................................... 37
Field Calibration Setup .................................................................................................................. 37
Bench Calibration Setup ................................................................................................................ 38
Calibration Using a PC20 ................................................................................................................... 39
Calibration Using a PC50 ................................................................................................................... 39
Calibration Using a HART Communicator .......................................................................................... 39
Calibration Using the Optional Local Display ..................................................................................... 39
Zero Adjustment Using External Zero Button ................................................................................ 42
Error Messages ................................................................................................................................ 44
5. Configuration ................................................................................................................................ 45
Configurable Parameters .................................................................................................................... 45
Configuration Using a PC20 ............................................................................................................... 46
Configuration Using a PC50 ............................................................................................................... 46
Configuration Using a HART Communicator ...................................................................................... 46
Configuration Using the Optional Local Display ................................................................................. 46
Character Lists ................................................................................................................................... 54
Error Messages .................................................................................................................................. 55
6. Maintenance.................................................................................................................................. 57
Error Messages .................................................................................................................................. 57
Parts Replacement ............................................................................................................................. 57
Replacing the Terminal Block Assembly ....................................................................................... 57
Replacing the Electronics Module Assembly ................................................................................ 57
Removing and Reinstalling a Housing Assembly .......................................................................... 59
Adding the Optional Display .......................................................................................................... 59
Replacing the Sensor Assembly ................................................................................................... 59
Rotating Process Covers for Venting ................................................................................................. 60
Index ................................................................................................................................................... 63
iv
Figures
1 Transmitter Identification ....................................................................................................... 3
2 Top Level Structure Diagram ................................................................................................. 4
3 Minimum Allowable Absolute Pressure vs. Process Temperature
with Fluorinert Fill Fluid .......................................................................................................... 7
4 Typical Mounting of an IDP10 Transmitter Supported by Process Piping ............................. 13
5 Typical Mounting of an IDP10 Transmitter Supported by a Bypass Manifold ....................... 14
6 Typical Mounting of IDP10 Transmitter on Coplanar Manifold .............................................. 14
7 Pipe or Surface Mounted Transmitter Using a Standard Bracket .......................................... 15
8 Examples of Mounting With a Standard Bracket ................................................................... 16
9 Details of a Universal Bracket ............................................................................................... 17
10 Mounting a Transmitter with Traditional Structure Using a Universal Bracket ...................... 17
11 Vertical Pipe Mounting a Transmitter with LP2 Structure Using a Universal Bracket ............ 18
12 Horizontal Mounting a Transmitter with LP2 Structure Using a Universal Bracket ................ 19
13 Vertical Mounting - Cavity Draining ....................................................................................... 20
14 Vertical Mounting - Cavity Venting ........................................................................................ 20
15 Horizontal Mounting - Cavity Venting .................................................................................... 20
16 Vertical Mounting - Cavity Venting ........................................................................................ 21
17 Horizontal Mounting - Cavity Venting and Draining ............................................................... 21
18 Cavity Venting and Draining .................................................................................................. 21
19 Example of Horizontal Process Line Installation ................................................................... 22
20 Example of Vertical Process Line Installation ........................................................................ 23
21 Housing Set Screw Location ................................................................................................. 24
22 Cover Lock Location .............................................................................................................. 25
23 Accessing Field Terminals ..................................................................................................... 25
24 Identification of Field Terminals ............................................................................................. 26
25 Supply Voltage and Loop Load ............................................................................................. 27
26 Loop Wiring Transmitters ...................................................................................................... 28
27 Wiring Several Transmitters to a Common Power Supply .................................................... 29
28 Typical Multidrop Network ..................................................................................................... 29
29 Local Display Module ............................................................................................................ 31
30 Top Level Structure Diagram ................................................................................................. 32
31 Display Test Segment Patterns ............................................................................................. 34
32 4 to 20 mA Output Calibration Setup of Electronic Equipment .............................................. 37
33 Field Calibration Setup .......................................................................................................... 38
34 Bench Calibration Setup ........................................................................................................ 39
35 Calibration Structure Diagram ............................................................................................... 41
36 Calibration Structure Diagram (Continued) ........................................................................... 42
37 Configuration Structure Diagram ........................................................................................... 48
38 Configuration Structure Diagram (Continued) ....................................................................... 49
39 Configuration Structure Diagram (Continued) ....................................................................... 50
40 Replacing the Electronics Module Assembly and Display ..................................................... 58
41 Replacing the Sensor Assembly ............................................................................................ 60
42 Replacing the Sensor Assembly (pvdf Inserts) ...................................................................... 60
43 Sensor Cavity Venting and Draining ...................................................................................... 61
v
Tables
1 Reference Documents ........................................................................................................... 1
2 Minimum Loop Load and Supply Voltage Requirements ...................................................... 8
3 Electrical Safety Specifications .............................................................................................. 11
4 Operation Error Messages .................................................................................................... 34
5 Calibration Menu ................................................................................................................... 40
6 Calibration Error Messages ................................................................................................... 44
7 IDP10-T Configurable Parameters ........................................................................................ 45
8 Configuration Menu ............................................................................................................... 46
9 Alphanumeric Character List ................................................................................................. 54
10 Numeric Character List .......................................................................................................... 54
11 Configuration Error Messages ............................................................................................... 55
vi
1. Introduction
General Description
The IDP10-T intelligent differential pressure transmitters measure the difference between two pres-
sures applied to opposite sides of a silicon strain gauge microsensor within the sensor assembly. This
microsensor converts differential pressure to a change in resistance. The resistance change is then
converted to a 4 to 20 mA or digital signal proportional to differential pressure or to the square root of
differential pressure. This measurement signal is transmitted to remote receivers over the same two
wires that supply power to the transmitter electronics. These wires also carry two-way data signals
between the transmitter and remote communication devices.
The transmitter allows direct analog connection to common receivers while still providing full Intelligent
Transmitter Digital Communications using a HART Communicator.
The transmitter is often used for measuring fluid flow rates across a primary device such as an orifice
plate, but can also be used for other types of differential pressure measurements such as liquid level,
interface level, or density measurements. The IDP10 can also be supplied with direct connected or
remote pressure seals to isolate the measuring element from corrosive or viscous fluids.
For more detailed information on the principle of operation of the transmitter, refer to document
TI 037-096, available from Invensys Process Systems.
Reference Documents
Table 1. Reference Documents
Document Description
Dimensional Prints
DP 020-342 Dimensional Print – PSFLT Pressure Seals
DP 020-343 Dimensional Print – PSFPS and PSFES Pressure Seals
DP 020-345 Dimensional Print – PSFAR Pressure Seals
DP 020-347 Dimensional Print – PSTAR Pressure Seals
DP 020-349 Dimensional Print – PSISR Pressure Seals
DP 020-351 Dimensional Print – PSSCR Pressure Seals
DP 020-353 Dimensional Print – PSSCT Pressure Seals
DP 020-354 Dimensional Print – PSSSR Pressure Seals
DP 020-355 Dimensional Print – PSSST Pressure Seals
DP 020-446 Dimensional Print – IDP10, IDP25, and IDP50 Differential Pressure Transmitters
DP 022-335 Dimensional Print – Model CO Compact Orifice
Parts Lists
PL 006-172 Parts List – Model CO Compact Orifice
1
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 1. Introduction
Table 1. Reference Documents (Continued)
Document Description
PL 009-005 Parts List – IDP10 Differential Pressure Transmitter
Instructions
MI 020-328 Instruction – Bubble Type Installation for Liquid Level
MI 020-329 Instruction – High Accuracy Flow Measurement
MI 020-366 Instruction – I/A Series Intelligent Pressure Transmitters Operation, Configuration, and
Calibration Using a HART Communicator
MI 020-369 Instruction – Pressure Seals
MI 020-427 Instruction – Intrinsic Safety Connection Diagrams and Nonincendive Circuits
MI 020-495 Instruction – PC20 Intelligent Transmitter Configurator
MI 020-501 Instruction – PC50 Intelligent Field Device Tool (Installation and Parts List)
MI 020-505 Instruction – PC50 Intelligent Field Device Tool (Operation Using HART Protocol)
MI 022-138 Instruction – Bypass Manifolds - Installation and Maintenance
MI 022-335 Instruction – Model CO Compact Orifice
Technical Information
TI 1-50a Technical Information – Liquid Density Measurement
TI 001-051 Technical Information – Liquid Interface Measurement
TI 001-052 Technical Information – Liquid Level Measurement
TI 37-75b Technical Information – Transmitter Material Selection Guide
TI 037-097 Technical Information – Process Sealing of I/A Series Pressure Transmitters for use in
Class 1, Zone 0, 1, and 2 Hazardous Locations
2
1. Introduction MI IDP10-T – July 2008
Transmitter Identification
See Figure 1 for transmitter data plate contents. For a complete explanation of the Model Number
code, see the parts list. The firmware version is identified on the top line of the display when VIEW DB
(View Database) is selected in the top level structure (see Figure 2).
MODEL CODE STYLE

SERIAL NUMBER CALIBRATED RANGE
AUXILIARY SPECIFICATION CODE PLANT AND DATE OF MANUFACTURE
SUPPLY VOLTAGE MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE
CUSTOMER TAG
MODEL ST
REFERENCE CAL. RANGE
AUX. SPEC. ORIGIN
SUPPLY MWP
CUST. TAG
Figure 1. Transmitter Identification
3
E E
(measurement M1 or M2) (measurement M2 or M1)
N
N
E
RERANGE LOCAL MODE, GO TO RERANGE MENU
N
E
CONFIG LOCAL MODE, GO TO CONFIGURATION MENU
N
E
CALIB OFF-LINE, GO TO CALIBRATION MENU
N
E
VIEW DB ON-LINE MODE
N N STEP THROUGH DATABASE DISPLAY
E
E
TST DSP ON-LINE MODE
N
N STEP THROUGH DISPLAY TEST PATTERN
E
E
CANCEL EXIT MODE SELECT MENU, RETURN TO ON-LINE MODE
N
N = NEXT BUTTON E = ENTER BUTTON
Figure 2. Top Level Structure Diagram
4
Standard Specifications
Operative Limits
Influence Operative Limits

(a)
Sensor Body Temperature
Silicone Fill Fluid -46 and +121°C (-50 and +250°F)
Fluorinert Fill Fluid -29 and +121°C (-20 and +250°F)
pvdf Inserts -7 and +82°C (20 and 180°F)
Electronics Temperature -40 and +85°C (-40 and +185°F)
With LCD Display -40 and +85°C (-40 and +185°F)(b)
Relative Humidity 0 and 100%
Supply Voltage 11.5 and 42 V dc
Output Load(c) 0 and 1450 ohms
Mounting Position No Limit
Vibration 6.3 mm (0.25 in) double amplitude from 5 to 15 Hz with aluminum housing
and from 5 to 9 Hz with 316 ss housing.
0 to 30 m/s (0 to 3 “g”) from 15 to 500 Hz with aluminum housing and
0 to 10 m/s (0 to 1 “g”) from 9 to 500 Hz with 316 ss housing.
(a) Refer to MI 020-369 for temperature limits with pressure seals.
(b) Display updates are slowed and readability decreased at temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).
(c) 250 Ω minimum load is required for communication with a HART Communicator.
Span and Range Limits

Span Limit Span Limits Range Limits
Code ∆P ∆P (a)
0.12 and 7.5 kPa -7.5 and +7.5 kPa
A(b) 0.5 and 30 inH20 -30 and +30 inH20
12 and 750 mmH20 -750 and +750 mmH20
0.87 and 50 kPa -50 and +50 kPa
B 3.5 and 200 inH20 -200 and +200 inH20
87 and 5000 mmH20 -5000 and +5000 mmH20
7.0 and 210 kPa -210 and +210 kPa
C 28 and 840 inH20 -840 and +840 inH20
2.3 and 69 ftH20 -69 and +69 ftH20
0.07 and 2.1 MPa -0.21 and +2.1 MPa
D 10 and 300 psi -30 and +300 psi
23 and 690 ftH20 -69 and +690 ftH20
0.7 and 21 MPa -0.21 and +21 MPa
E
100 and 3000 psi -30 and +3000 psi
(a) Negative values of differential pressure indicate a higher pressure on the low side of the sensor.
Positive values indicate a higher pressure on the high side of the sensor.
(b) Span Limit Code “A” not available with pressure seals.
Maximum Static, Overrange, and Proof Pressure

Maximum Static and Overrange
Pressure Rating(a,e,f) Proof Pressure Rating(b)
Transmitter Configuration
(Bolting Material)(c) MPa Psi MPa Psi
Standard (B7 steel), 25 3625 100 14500
Option “-B2” (17-4 PH ss),
Option “-D3” or “-D7”
5
Maximum Static and Overrange

Pressure Rating(a,e,f) Proof Pressure Rating(b)
Transmitter Configuration
(Bolting Material)(c) MPa Psi MPa Psi
Option “B1” (316 ss) or 15 2175 60 8700
Option “-D5”
Option “B3” (B7M) 20 2900 70 11150
Option “-D1” 16 2320 64 9280
Option “-D2”, “-D4”, 10 1500 40 6000
“-D6”, or “-D8”(d)
Option “-D9” (17-4 PH ss) 40 5800 100 14500
(a) Either side can be at higher pressure during overrange.
(b) Meets ANSI/ISA Standard S82.03-1988.
(c) -D1 = DIN Single ended process cover with M10 B7 bolting.
-D2 = DIN Double ended process cover with M10 B7 bolting
-D3 = DIN Single ended process cover with 7/16 in B7 bolting.
-D4 = DIN Double ended process cover with 7/16 in B7 bolting.
-D5 = DIN Single ended process cover with 7/16 in 316 ss bolting.
-D6 = DIN Double ended process cover with 7/16 in 316 ss bolting.
-D7 = DIN Single ended process cover with 7/16 in 17-4 ss bolting.
-D8 = DIN Double ended process cover with 7/16 in 17-4 ss bolting
-D9 = DIN Single ended process cover with 7/16 in 17-4 ss bolting.
(d) Limited to operating temperatures ranging from 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F).
(e) When Structure Codes 78/79 are used (pvdf inserts in the Hi and Lo side process covers), the
maximum overrange is 2.1 MPa (300 psi) and temperature limits are -7 and +82°C (20 and 180°F).
(f) Static pressure rating of 40 MPa (5800 psi) with Option Code -Y.
NOTE
Static pressure zero shift for all calibrated spans can be eliminated by readjusting the
zero output at nominal operating static pressure.
! CAUTION
1. Exceeding the maximum overrange pressure can cause damage to the transmitter
degrading its performance.
2. The transmitter could be nonfunctional after application of the proof pressure.
Elevated Zero and Suppressed Zero

For applications requiring an elevated or suppressed zero, the maximum span and the upper
and lower range limits of the transmitter can not be exceeded.
Sensor Fill Fluid

Silicone Oil (DC 200) or Fluorinert (FC-43)
6
Minimum Allowable Absolute Pressure vs. Process Temperature

With Silicone Fill Fluid: At full vacuum: Up to 121°C (250°F)
With Fluorinert Fill Fluid: Refer to Figure 3.
Temperature °C
-80 0 30 60 90 120
140
120
Fluorinert FC-43 Fluid

Absolute Pressure, mmHg
100
(operating area above curve)
80
60
40
20
-25 0 50 100 150 200 250

Temperature °F
Figure 3. Minimum Allowable Absolute Pressure vs. Process Temperature

with Fluorinert Fill Fluid
Mounting Position
The transmitter can be mounted in any orientation. It can be supported by the process piping.
It can also be mounted directly to a vertical or horizontal pipe or surface mounted using an
optional mounting bracket. The housing can be rotated up to one full turn to any desired
position for access to adjustments, display, or conduit connections. See “Positioning the
Housing” on page 24. The display (if present) can also be rotated in the housing to any of four
different positions at 90° increments. See “Positioning the Display” on page 24.
NOTE
Position effect zero shift for all calibrated spans can be eliminated by readjusting zero
output after installation.
Approximate Mass
Without Process Connectors 3.5 kg (7.8 lb)
With Process Connectors 4.2 kg (9.2 lb)
With Optional 316 ss Housing Add 1.1 kg (2.4 lb)
With Pressure Seals Varies with seal used
Process Connections
IDP10 transmitters are connected to the process via a 1/4 NPT thread or any one of a
number of optional process connectors.
Process Wetted Materials

Diaphragm: 316L ss, Co-Ni-Cr, Hastelloy C, Monel, gold plated 316L ss, or tantalum
Covers and Process Connections: 316 ss, carbon steel, Hastelloy C, Monel, or pvdf inserts
Pressure Seals: Refer to MI 020-369
7
Process Pressure and Temperature Limits for Pressure Seals

Refer to MI 020-369
Electrical Connections
Field wires enter through 1/2 NPT, PG 13.5, or M20 threaded entrances on either side of the
electronics housing. Leads terminate under screw terminals and washers on the terminal
block in the field terminal compartment. To maintain RFI/EMI, environmental, and
explosionproof ratings, unused conduit connection must be plugged with metal plug
(provided), inserted to five full threads for 1/2 NPT connections; seven full threads for M20 and
PG 13.5 connections.
Field Wiring Reversal

Accidental reversal of field wiring will not damage the transmitter, provided the current is
limited to 1 A or less by active current limiting or loop resistance. Sustained currents of 1 A will
not damage the electronics module or sensor but could damage the terminal block assembly
and external instruments in the loop.
Adjustable Damping
The transmitter response time is normally 1.0 second or the electronically adjustable setting of
0.00 (none), 0.25, 0.50, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds, whichever is greater, for a 90% recovery
from an 80% input step as defined in ANSI/ISA S51.1.
Output Signal
4 to 20 mA dc linear or 4 to 20 mA dc square root; software selectable. The output is remotely
configurable from the HART Communicator and locally configurable with the pushbuttons on
the display.
NOTE
Only 4 to 20 mA linear output on absolute pressure, gauge pressure, and flange level
transmitters.
Zero and Span Adjustments

Zero and span are adjustable from the HART Communicator. They are also adjustable at the
transmitter using the display. An optional external self-contained moisture sealed pushbutton
assembly allows local resetting of zero without removing the housing cover.
Power-up Time
Less than 2.0 seconds for output to reach the first valid measurement, then at the electronic
damping rate to reach the final measured variable value.
Supply Voltage
Power supply must be capable of providing 22 mA when the transmitter is configured for 4 to
20 mA output. Ripple of up to 2 V pp (50/60/100/120 Hz) is tolerable, but instantaneous
voltage must remain within specified range.
The supply voltage and loop load must be within specified limits. This is explained in detail in
“Wiring” on page 25. A summary of the minimum requirements is listed in Table 2.
Table 2. Minimum Loop Load and Supply Voltage Requirements
HART No HART
Communication Communication
Minimum Resistance 250 Ω 0
Minimum Supply Voltage 17 V 11.5 V
8
Electrical Ground Connections

The transmitter is equipped with an internal ground connection within the field wiring
compartment and an external ground connection at the base of the electronics housing. To
minimize galvanic corrosion, place the wire lead or contact between the captive washer and
loose washer on the external ground screw. If shielded cable is used, earth (ground) the shield
at the field enclosure only. Do not ground the shield at the transmitter.
HART Communicator Connection Points

The HART Communicator can be connected in the loop as shown in “Wiring” on page 25. It
can also be connected directly to the transmitter at the two upper banana plug receptacles.
Test Points
The two lower banana plug receptacles (designated CAL) can be used to check transmitter
output when configured for 4 to 20 mA. Measurements should be 100-500 mV dc for 0-100%
transmitter output.
Remote Communications
The transmitter communicates bidirectionally over the 2-wire field wiring to a HART
Communicator. The information that can be continuously displayed is:
♦ Process Measurement (expressed in one or two types of units)
♦ Transmitter Temperature (sensor and electronics)
♦ mA Output (equivalent)
The information that can be remotely displayed and reconfigured includes:
♦ Output in Percent Flow (square root) or Pressure Units (linear). Percent Display in Linear
mode on local display is also supported.
♦ Zero and Span, including reranging
♦ Zero Elevation or Suppression
♦ Linear Output or Square Root Output (in some models)
♦ Pressure or Flow Units (from list provided)
♦ Temperature Sensor Failure Strategy
♦ Electronic Damping
♦ Poll Address (Multidrop mode)
♦ External Zero (Enable or Disable)
♦ Failsafe Direction
♦ Tag, Description, and Message
♦ Date of Last Calibration
Communications Format
Communication is based upon the FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) technique. The frequencies
are superimposed on the transmitter power/signal leads.
4 to 20 mA Output
The transmitter sends its differential pressure measurement to the loop as a continuous 4 to
20 mA dc signal. It also communicates digitally with the HART Communicator at distances up
to 3000 m (10 000 ft). Communication between the remote configurator and the transmitter
does not disturb the 4 to 20 mA output signal. Other specifications are:
9
Data Transmission Rate: 1200 Baud

4 - 20 mA Update Rate: 30 times/second
Output when Fail Low: 3.60 mA
Output when Fail High: 21.00 mA
Output when Underrange 3.80 mA
Output when Overrange 20.50 mA
Output when Offline: User configurable
between 4 and 20 mA
Product Safety Specifications

! DANGER
To prevent possible explosions and to maintain flameproof, explosionproof, and dust-
ignitionproof protection, observe applicable wiring practices. Plug unused conduit opening
with the provided metal pipe plug. Both plug and conduit must engage a minimum of five
full threads for 1/2 NPT connections; seven full threads for M20 and PG 13.5 connections.
! WARNING
To maintain IEC IP66 and NEMA Type 4X protection, the unused conduit opening must be
plugged with the metal plug provided. Use a suitable thread sealant on both conduit
connections. In addition, the threaded housing covers must be installed. Turn covers to
seat the O-ring into the housing and then continue to hand tighten until the cover contacts
the housing metal-to-metal.
NOTE
1. These transmitters have been designed to meet the electrical safety description listed
in Table 3. For detailed information or status of testing laboratory
approvals/certifications, contact Invensys Process Systems.
2. Wiring restrictions required to maintain electrical certification of the transmitter are
provided in “Wiring” on page 25.
10
Table 3. Electrical Safety Specifications

Agency Certification, Electrical
Types of Protection, Safety Design
and Area Classification Application Conditions Code
ATEX flameproof: II 2 GD EEx d IIC, Zone 1. KEMA 00ATEX2019X

Temperature Class T6, T85°C, D
Ta = -40 to +80°C
ATEX intrinsically safe: II 1 GD EEx ia IIC, SIRA 06ATEX2055X
E
Zone 0. Temperature Class T4,Ta = -40 to +80°C
ATEX protection n: II 3 GD EEx nL IIC, SIRA 06ATEX4056X
N
Zone 2. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40 to +80°C
ATEX multiple certifications, ia & ib and n. Applies to Codes D, E, and N.(a)
M
Refer to Codes E and N for details.
CSA intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Connect per MI 020-427. Temperature
Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1, Class T4A at 40°C (104°F) and T3C at
Groups E, F, and G; Class III, Division 1. 85°C (185°F) maximum ambient.
Also, Zone certified intrinsically safe Ex ia IIC Temperature Class T4 at 40°C (104°F),
and energy limited Ex nA II. and T3 at 85°C (185°F) max. ambient.
CSA explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Maximum Ambient Temperature 85°C C
Groups B, C, and D; dust-ignitionproof for (185°F).
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G;
Class III, Division 1.
CSA for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, Temperature Class T4A at 40°C (104°F)
and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; and T3C at 85°C (185°F) maximum
Class III, Division 2. ambient.
CSA field device zone certified flameproof Maximum Ambient Temperature 85°C
Ex d IIC. Also, all certifications of Code C (185°F). B
above.
FM intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Connect per MI 020-427. Temperature
Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1, Class T4A at 40°C (104°F) and T4 at 85°C
Groups E, F, and G; Class III, Division 1. (185°F) maximum ambient.
Also, Zone certified intrinsically safe Temperature Class T4 at 85°C (185°F)

AEx ia IIC. maximum ambient.
FM explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Temperature Class T6 at 80°C (176°F) F
Groups B, C, and D; dust-ignitionproof for and T5 at 85°C (185°F) maximum
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; ambient.
FM nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Temperature Class T4A at 40°C (104°F)
Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Division 2, and T4 at 85°C (185°F) maximum
Groups F and G; Class III, Division 2. ambient.
FM field device zone certified flameproof Temperature Class T6 at 75°C (167°F)
AEx d IIC. Also, all certifications of Code F maximum ambient. G
above.
IECEx intrinsically safe: Ex ia IIC. IECEx SIR 06.0010X
T
Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40 to +80°C.
11
Table 3. Electrical Safety Specifications (Continued)

Agency Certification, Electrical
Types of Protection, Safety Design
and Area Classification Application Conditions Code
IECEx protection n: Ex nL IIC IECEx SIR 06.0011X

U
Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40 to +80°C.
IECEx flameproof: Ex d IIC IECEx FMG 06.0007X, Ex d IIC
T6 Ta=80°C, T5 Ta=85°C V
Ambient Temperature -20 to +85°C
(a) User must permanently mark (check off in rectangular block on data plate) one type of protection only (ia and
ib, d, or n). This mark cannot be changed once it is applied.
ATEX and IECEx Warnings

Do not open while circuits are alive.
ATEX Compliance Documents

EN 50014: 1997 (A1 and A2)
EN 50020: 2002
EN 50284: 1999
EN 50281-1-1: 1998
EN 60079-15: 2004
IECEx Compliance Documents

IEC 60079-0 (Edition 3.1): 2000
IEC 60079-0 (Edition 4): 2000
IEC 60079-1 (Edition 5): 2003
IEC 60079-11 (Edition 4): 1999
12
2. Installation
! CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transmitter sensor, do not use any impact devices, such as an
impact wrench or stamping device, on the transmitter.
NOTE
1. The transmitter should be mounted so that any moisture condensing or draining into
the field wiring compartment can exit through one of the two threaded conduit
connections.
2. Use a suitable thread sealant on all connections.
Transmitter Mounting
The IDP Series differential pressure transmitter can be supported by the process piping or mounted to
a vertical or horizontal pipe or surface using the optional mounting bracket. See figures below. For
dimensional information, refer to DP 020-446.
NOTE
1. If the transmitter is not installed in the vertical position, readjust the zero output to
eliminate the position zero effect.
2. When structure codes 78/79 are used (pvdf inserts) with the IDP10 transmitters, the
process connection must be made directly to the pvdf inserts in the high and low side
process covers.
Process Mounting
With process mounting, the transmitter mounted to and supported by the process piping.
TRADITIONAL STRUCTURE LP1 STRUCTURE LP2 STRUCTURE
SEE
SEE NOTE
SEE NOTE
NOTE
NOTE: MARK INDICATING LOW AND HIGH PRESSURE SIDE OF TRANSMITTER
Figure 4. Typical Mounting of an IDP10 Transmitter Supported by Process Piping
13
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 2. Installation
Manifold Mounted Transmitter

With manifold mounting, the transmitter is mounted to and supported by a bypass manifold. The
bypass manifold can be mounted to a DN50 or 2 inch pipe with an optional mounting bracket. See
MI 022-138.
M4A MANIFOLD MB3 MANIFOLD
Figure 5. Typical Mounting of an IDP10 Transmitter Supported by a Bypass Manifold
Transmitter Mounted on a Coplanar™ Manifold
ADAPTER PLATE
AND GASKETS
MT3 MANIFOLD MC3 MANIFOLD

Figure 6. Typical Mounting of IDP10 Transmitter on Coplanar Manifold
14
2. Installation MI IDP10-T – July 2008
Pipe or Surface Mounting

To mount the transmitter to a pipe or surface, use the Standard Mounting Bracket Set (Model Code
Option -M1 or M2) or Universal Bracket Mounting Set (Model Code Option -M3).
Standard Mounting Bracket

The transmitter (with either traditional or LP2 low-profile structures) can be mounted to a vertical or
horizontal, DN 50 or 2-in pipe using a standard bracket. See Figures 7 and 8 for details of a standard
bracket and examples of different mounting situations. Secure the mounting bracket to the transmitter
using the four screws provided. Mount the bracket to the pipe. To mount to a horizontal pipe, turn the
U-bolt 90° from the position shown. The mounting bracket can also be used for wall mounting by
securing the bracket to a wall using the U-bolt mounting holes.
APPROXIMATELY 3 IN
CLEARANCE REQUIRED
FOR ACCESS TO MOUNTING
BOLTS AND VENT SCREW.
FOR SURFACE MOUNTING,

REPLACE U-BOLT WITH TWO
0.375 IN DIAMETER BOLTS
OPTIONAL SIDE VENT OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH TO
PASS THROUGH BRACKET
AND SURFACE
VERTICAL DN 50 OR 2 IN PIPE
BRACKET SHOWN. ROTATE U-BOLT 90 °
FOR MOUNTING TO HORIZONTAL
PIPE
Figure 7. Pipe or Surface Mounted Transmitter Using a Standard Bracket
15
VERTICAL PIPE HORIZONTAL PIPE

LP2 STRUCTURE TRADITIONAL STRUCTURE LP2 STRUCTURE TRADITIONAL STRUCTURE
Figure 8. Examples of Mounting With a Standard Bracket
16
Universal Mounting Bracket

The transmitter (with either traditional or LP2 low-profile structure) can be mounted in a myriad of posi-
tions to a vertical or horizontal, DN 50 or 2-in pipe using a universal bracket. See the following figures
for details of a universal bracket and examples of different mounting situations. Secure the mounting
bracket to the transmitter using the two long or four short screws provided. Mount the bracket to the
pipe. The mounting bracket can also be used for wall mounting by securing the bracket to a wall using
the U-bolt mounting holes.
U-BOLT ASSEMBLY
FOR DN 50 OR 2 in PIPE
HOLES FOR
U-BOLT AND
SURFACE BOLTS TO MOUNT
MOUNTING TRANSMITTER
ON FOUR TO BRACKET
SIDES OF THIS
BRACKET LEG,
BOLTS TO MOUNT
TRANSMITTER TO
BRACKET
HOLES TO MOUNT TRANSMITTER

TO BRACKET OR FOR SURFACE
MOUNTING ON FOUR SIDES OF
THIS BRACKET LEG
Figure 9. Details of a Universal Bracket
VERTICAL PIPE HORIZONTAL PIPE
Figure 10. Mounting a Transmitter with Traditional Structure Using a Universal Bracket
17
Figure 11. Vertical Pipe Mounting a Transmitter with LP2 Structure Using a Universal Bracket
18
Figure 12. Horizontal Mounting a Transmitter with LP2 Structure Using a Universal Bracket
19
Venting and Draining

Traditional Structure
Sensor cavity venting and draining is provided for both vertical and horizontal mounting. For vertical
mounted units, draining is via a drain screw and venting is possible with side vents (Option Code -V).
For horizontal mounted units, the unit is self draining and venting is via a vent screw.
PROCESS
DRAIN SCREW
COVER
Figure 13. Vertical Mounting - Cavity Draining
OPTIONAL
SIDE VENT
SHOWN
PLUG
Figure 14. Vertical Mounting - Cavity Venting
VENT SCREW
Figure 15. Horizontal Mounting - Cavity Venting
LP1 Low Profile Structure

Sensor cavity venting and draining is provided for both vertical and horizontal mounting. For vertical
mounted units, the transmitter is self draining and venting is via a vent screw. For horizontal mounted
units, the transmitter can simply be ‘turned over’ (rotated 180 degrees) to orient the high and low pres-
sure sides in the preferred locations. There is no need to unbolt the process covers. If the transmitter is
connected with a length of impulse piping, such piping should slope up to the transmitter for gas appli-
cations and down for liquid applications.
20
VENT
SCREW
IN-LINE
PROCESS
CONNECTION
Figure 16. Vertical Mounting - Cavity Venting
PROCESS VENT PROCESS DRAIN

CONNECTION SCREW CONNECTION SCREW
Figure 17. Horizontal Mounting - Cavity Venting and Draining
LP2 Low Profile Structure

The transmitter with LP2 low profile structure had a full-featured vent and drain design with separate
vent and drain screws positioned in each cover for complete venting and draining from the sensor
cavity.
VENT &
DRAIN
SCREWS
Figure 18. Cavity Venting and Draining
Installation of Flow Measurement Piping

Figures 19 and 20 show typical installations with horizontal and vertical process pipes.
The transmitters are shown below the level of the pressure connections at the pipe (usual arrange-
ment, except for gas flow without a seal liquid), and with filling tees in the lines to the transmitter (for a
seal liquid).
If the process fluid being measured must not come in contact with the transmitter, the transmitter lines
must be filled with a suitable seal liquid (see procedure in next section). In such a case, the transmitter
must be mounted below the level of the pressure connections at the pipe. With steam flow, the lines
are filled with water to protect the transmitter from the hot steam. The seal liquid (or water) is added to
the lines through the filling tees. To prevent unequal heads on the transmitter, the tees must be at the
21
same elevation and the transmitter must be mounted vertically (as shown). If a seal liquid is not
required, elbows can be used in place of the tees.
Tighten drain plugs and optional vent screws to 20 N⋅m (15 lb⋅ft). Tighten the four process connector
bolts to a torque of 61 N⋅m (45 lb⋅ft).
Note that the low and high pressure sides of the transmitter are identified by an L-H marking on the
side of the sensor above the warning label.
With medium viscosity seal liquids and/or long transmitter lines, larger valve sizes should be used.
NOTE
1. With a horizontal line, pressure connections at the pipe should be at the side of the
line. However, with gas flow without a seal liquid, connections should be at top of line.
2. With a vertical line, flow should be upwards.
3. For liquid or steam flow, the transmitter should be mounted lower than the pressure
connections at the pipe.
4. For gas flow without a seal liquid, the transmitter should be mounted above the
pressure connections at the pipe; for gas flow with a seal liquid, the transmitter should
be mounted below the pressure connections.
5. Invensys Process Systems recommends the use of snubbers in installations prone to
high levels of fluid pulsations.
SHUT OFF VALVES DIRECTION OF

PRESSURE FLOW
TRANSMITTER
HIGH
PRESSURE
SIDE
FILLING TEES
LOW PRESSURE SIDE
PIPE OR TUBING
OPTIONAL
3-VALVE
MANIFOLD
Figure 19. Example of Horizontal Process Line Installation
22
PROCESS DIRECTION OF
SHUT OFF VALVES PRESSURE FLOW
LOW TRANSMITTER
FILLING TEES PRESSURE
SIDE
HIGH
PRESSURE
SIDE
PIPE OR TUBING
OPTIONAL
3-VALVE
MANIFOLD
Figure 20. Example of Vertical Process Line Installation
Filling System with Seal Liquid

If the process fluid being measured must not come in contact with the transmitter, the transmitter lines
must be filled with a suitable seal liquid. The procedure to do this is as follows:
1. If the transmitter is in service, follow the procedure for “Taking a Differential Pressure
Transmitter Out of Operation” on page 30.
2. Close both process shutoff valves.
3. Open all three valves on the 3-valve manifold.
4. Partially open the vent screws on the transmitter until all air has been forced out of the
transmitter body and lines. Close the vent screws.
5. Refill the tee connections. Replace the plugs and close the bypass valve. Check for leaks.
6. Follow the procedure for “Putting a Differential Pressure Transmitter Into Operation” on
page 30.
! CAUTION
To prevent loss of seal liquid and contamination of process fluid, never open both process
shutoff valves and manifold shutoff valves if the bypass valve is open.
23
Positioning the Housing

The transmitter housing (topworks) can be rotated up to one full turn in the counterclockwise direction
when viewed from above for optimum access to adjustments, display, or conduit connections.
! WARNING
If the electronics housing is removed for any reason, it must be hand tightened fully. Then
engage the set screw until it bottoms out and back it off 1/8th turn. Fill the set screw recess
with red lacquer (Foxboro Part number X0180GS or equivalent). The housing then may be
rotated up to one full turn in a counterclockwise direction for optimum access to
adjustments.
SET SCREW
Figure 21. Housing Set Screw Location
Positioning the Display

The display (optional in some models) can be rotated within the housing to any of four positions at 90°
increments. To do this, grasp the two tabs on the display and rotate it about 10° in a counterclockwise
direction. Pull out the display. Ensure that the O-ring is fully seated in its groove in the display housing.
Turn the display to the desired position, reinsert it in the electronics module, aligning the tabs on the
sides of the assembly, and twist it in the clockwise direction.
! CAUTION
Do not turn the display more than 180° in any direction. Doing so could damage its
connecting cable.
Setting the Write Protect Jumper

Your transmitter has write protection capability. This means that the external zero, local display, and
remote communications can be prevented from writing to the electronics. Write protection is set by
moving a jumper that is located in the electronics compartment behind the optional display. To activate
write protection, remove the display as described in the previous section, then remove the jumper or
move it to the lower position as shown on the exposed label. Replace the display.
Cover Locks
Electronic housing cover locks, shown in Figure 22, are provided as standard with certain agency cer-
tifications and as part of the Custody Transfer Lock and Seal option. To lock the covers, unscrew the
locking pin until approximately 6 mm (0.25 in) shows, lining up the hole in the pin with the hole in the
24
housing. Insert the seal wire through the two holes, slide the seal onto the wire ends and crimp the
seal
COVER LOCK (2) (IF PRESENT)
Figure 22. Cover Lock Location
Wiring
The installation and wiring of your transmitter must conform to local code requirements.
! WARNING
ATEX requires that when the equipment is intended to be used in an explosive
atmosphere caused by the presence of combustible dust, cable entry devices and
blanking elements shall provide a degree of ingress protection of at least IP6X. They shall
be suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed.
NOTE
Invensys Process Systems recommends the use of transient/surge protection in
installations prone to high levels of electrical transients and surges.
Accessing Transmitter Field Terminals

For access to the field terminals, thread the cover lock (if present) into the housing to clear the
threaded cover and remove the cover from the field terminals compartment as shown in Figure 23.
Note that the embossed letters FIELD TERMINALS identify the proper compartment.
1/2 NPT, PG 13.5 OR M20 CONDUIT CONNECTION FOR

CUSTOMER WIRING. ONE ON OPPOSITE SIDE ALSO.
PLUG UNUSED OPENING WITH PLUG PROVIDED (OR
EQUIVALENT).
REMOVE COVER TO ACCESS

WIRING TERMINALS.
EXTERNAL EARTH
(GROUND)
Figure 23. Accessing Field Terminals
25
BANANA PLUG RECEPTACLES FOR

EARTH (GROUND) SCREW HART CONNECTIONS
(+) (+)
HHT
TRANSMITTER BANANA PLUG RECEPTACLES FOR
SIGNAL CALIBRATION CONNECTIONS. TO READ
CONNECTIONS TRANSMITTER OUTPUT, ATTACH METER
(–) (-) LEADS HERE (100 TO 500 MV REPRE-
CAL SENTING 4 TO 20 mA CURRENT).
OPTIONAL SHORTING BAR (SB-11) TO

REDUCE MINIMUM VOLTAGE FROM
11.5 V dc TO 11 V dc ALSO PLUGS IN HERE.
Figure 24. Identification of Field Terminals
Wiring the Transmitter to a Control Loop

When wiring the transmitter, the supply voltage and loop load must be within specified limits. The sup-
ply output load vs. voltage relationship is:
RMAX = 47.5 (V - 11.5) and is shown in Figure 25.
NOTE
The relationship when the optional shorting bar is used is:
RMAX = 46.8 (V - 11).
Any combination of supply voltage and loop load resistance in the shaded area can be used. To deter-
mine the loop load resistance (transmitter output load), add the series resistance of each component in
the loop, excluding the transmitter. The power supply must be capable of supplying 22 mA of loop cur-
rent.
26
1450
1400
TYPICAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE
AND LOAD LIMITS
1300
1200 V dc LOAD (OHMS)
1100 24 250 AND 594

30 250 AND 880
32 250 AND 975
1000
900 NOTES:
1. THE MINIMUM LOAD FOR THE HART COMMUNICATOR
800 IS 250 Ω.
OUTPUT LOAD, Ω
2. THE TRANSMITTER CAN FUNCTION WITH AN OUTPUT LOAD

LESS THAN THE MINIMUM, PROVIDED THAT A REMOTE
700
CONFIGURATOR IS NOT CONNECTED TO IT. CONNECTING
A REMOTE CONFIGURATOR WHILE OPERATING IN THIS AREA
600
COULD CAUSE OUTPUT DISTURBANCES AND/OR COMMUNI-
CATION PROBLEMS.
500
MINIMUM LOAD
400 (SEE NOTE)
OPERATING AREA
300
200
100
0 10 20 30 40
11.5 42
SUPPLY VOLTAGE, V dc
Figure 25. Supply Voltage and Loop Load
Examples:
1. For a loop load resistance of 880 Ω, the supply voltage can be any value from 30 to
42 V dc.
2. For a supply voltage of 24 V dc, the loop load resistance can be any value from 250 to
594 Ω (zero to 594 Ω without a HART Communicator connected to the transmitter).
To wire one or more transmitters to a power supply, proceed with the following steps.
1. Remove the cover from the transmitter field terminals compartment.
2. Run signal wires (0.50 mm2 or 20 AWG, typical) through one of the transmitter conduit
connections. Use twisted single pair to protect the 4 to 20 mA output and/or remote
communications from electrical noise. Maximum recommended length for signal wires is:
♦ 3050 m (10,000 ft) using single pair cable and adhering to requirements of HART
physical layer implementation defined in HART Document HCF_SPEC-53. Use CN=1
when calculating max. lengths.
♦ 1525 m (5000 ft) in a multidrop (15 devices maximum) mode.
Screened (shielded) cable could be required in some locations.
NOTE
Do not run transmitter wires in same conduit as mains (ac power) wires.
3. If shielded cable is used, earth (ground) the shield at the power supply only. Do not
ground the shield at the transmitter.
27
4. Plug unused conduit connection with the 1/2 NPT, PG 13.5 or M20 metal plug provided (or
equivalent). To maintain specified explosionproof and dust-ignitionproof protection, plug
must engage a minimum of five full threads for 1/2 NPT connections; seven full threads
for M20 and PG 13.5 connections.
5. Connect an earth (ground) wire to the earth terminal in accordance with local practice.
! CAUTION
If the signal circuit must be earthed (grounded), it is preferable to do so at the negative
terminal of the dc power supply. To avoid errors resulting from earth loops or the possibility
of short-circuiting groups of instruments in a loop, there should be only one earth in a loop.
6. Connect the power supply and receiver loop wires to the “+” and “–” terminal connections.
7. Connect receivers (such as controllers, recorders, indicators) in series with power supply
and transmitter as shown in Figure 26.
8. Reinstall the cover onto the housing by rotating it clockwise to seat the O-ring into the
housing and then continue to hand tighten until the cover contacts the housing metal-to-
metal. If cover locks are present, lock the cover per the procedure described in “Cover
Locks” on page 24.
9. If wiring additional transmitters to the same power supply, repeat Steps 1 through 8 for
each additional transmitter. The setup with multiple transmitters connected to a single
power supply is shown in Figure 27.
10. A HART Communicator or PC-Based Configurator can be connected in the loop between
the transmitter and the power supply as shown in Figures 26 and 27. Note that a minimum
of 250 Ω must separate the power supply from the HART Communicator or PC-Based
Configurator.
AREA CLASSIFICATION NOT TO EXCEED NON-HAZARDOUS

RATING SPECIFIED ON TRANSMITTER LOCATION
DATA PLATE OR HART COMMUNICATOR.
INTRINSIC (b)
PC-BASED
EARTH SAFETY CONFIGURATOR
FIELD
(GROUND) BARRIER.
TERMINALS
SCREW
(a)
CONDUIT INDICATOR
+
+
POWER
PLUG SUPPLY
UNUSED _ _
CONDUIT + _
CONNECTION
(b) CONTROLLER
HART COMMUNICATOR
OR RECORDER
(a) RUN CONDUIT DOWN TO AVOID MOISTURE BUILDUP IN TERMINALS COMPARTMENT.

(b) THERE MUST BE AT LEAST 250 Ω TOTAL RESISTANCE BETWEEN THE HART COMMUNICATOR
OR PC-BASED CONFIGURATOR AND THE POWER SUPPLY.
Figure 26. Loop Wiring Transmitters
28
POWER
SUPPLY
250 Ω
min.(a) 250 Ω 250 Ω
min.(a) min.(a)
+ – + – + –
TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
(a) 250 Ω MINIMUM LOAD (INCLUDING RESISTANCE OF OTHER INSTRUMENTS)

IN EACH LOOP IS REQUIRED WHEN USING A HART COMMUNICATOR
OR PC-BASED CONFIGURATOR.
(b) (b) CONNECT HART COMMUNICATOR OR PC-BASED CONFIGURATOR BETWEEN

HART COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER AND ITS ASSOCIATED INSTRUMENTS AS SHOWN.
OR PC-BASED
CONFIGURATOR
Figure 27. Wiring Several Transmitters to a Common Power Supply
Multidrop Communication
“Multidropping” refers to the connection of several transmitters to a single communications transmis-
sion line. Communications between the host computer and the transmitters takes place digitally with
the analog output of the transmitter deactivated. With the HART communications protocol, up to 15
transmitters can be connected on a single twisted pair of wires or over leased telephone lines.
The application of a multidrop installation requires consideration of the update rate necessary from
each transmitter, the combination of transmitter models, and the length of the transmission line. Multi-
drop installations are not recommended where Intrinsic Safety is a requirement. Communication with
the transmitters can be accomplished with any HART compatible modem and a host implementing the
HART protocol. Each transmitter is identified by a unique address (1-15) and responds to the com-
mands defined in the HART protocol.
Figure 28 shows a typical multidrop network. Do not use this figure as an installation diagram. Contact
the HART Communications Foundation, (512) 794-0369, with specific requirements for multidrop
applications.
HOST MODEM
LOAD
POWER
SUPPLY IDP10-T IDP10-T IDP10-T
Figure 28. Typical Multidrop Network
The HART Communicator can operate, configure, and calibrate IASPT transmitters with HART com-
munication protocol in the same way as it can in a standard point-to-point installation.
29
NOTE
IASPT transmitters with HART communication protocol are set to poll address 0
(POLLADR 0) at the factory, allowing them to operate in the standard point-to-point
manner with a 4 to 20 mA output signal. To activate multidrop communication, the
transmitter address must be changed to a number from 1 to 15. Each transmitter must
be assigned a unique number on each multidrop network. This change deactivates the
4 to 20 mA analog output.
Connecting the Transmitter to an I/A Series System

The transmitter can also send its measurement to an I/A Series system as a digital signal via an
FBM214/215. Wiring terminations at the transmitter are the same as described above. For other sys-
tem wiring details, refer to the installation instructions provided with the I/A Series system.
Putting a Differential Pressure Transmitter Into Operation

The following procedure explains how to sequence the valves in your flow measurement piping or
optional bypass manifold to ensure that your transmitter is not overranged and that seal liquid is not
lost. Refer to Figures 19 and 20.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the process shutoff valves are open.
1. Make sure that both upstream and downstream manifold valves are closed.
2. Make sure that the bypass valve is open.
3. Slowly open the upstream manifold valve.
4. Close the bypass valve.
5. Slowly open the downstream manifold valve.
Taking a Differential Pressure Transmitter Out of Operation

The following procedure explains how to sequence the valves in your flow measurement piping or
optional bypass manifold to ensure that your transmitter is not overranged and that seal liquid is not
lost. Refer to the Figures 19 and 20.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the process shutoff valves are open.
1. Close the downstream manifold valve.

2. Close the upstream manifold valve.
3. Open the bypass valve.
4. Carefully open the vent screw to release any residual pressure before disconnecting lines.
! WARNING
When venting pressure from the transmitter, wear suitable protective equipment to prevent
possible injury from process material, temperature, or pressure.
30
3. Operation Via Local Display
A local display, as shown in Figure 29, has two lines of information. The upper line is a 5-digit numeric
display (4-digit when a minus sign is needed); the lower line is a 7-digit alphanumeric display. The dis-
play provides local indication of measurement information.
The display can be configured to meet your specific needs. If configured Show 1, M1 is displayed. If
configured Show 2, M2 is displayed. To temporarily view the alternate measurement, press the Enter
button. After showing this measurement for a brief period, the display reverts to the configured display.
If configured Toggle, the display toggles between M1 and M2. When M2 is displayed, an M2 mes-
sage blinks in the lower right of the display.
The display also provides a means for reranging, calibration, and configuration, viewing the database,
testing the display, and reranging the transmitter via the 2-button keypad. You can access these oper-
ations by means of a multi-level menu system. Entry to the Mode Select menu is made (from normal
operating mode) by pressing the Next button. You can exit this menu, restore your prior calibration or
configuration, and return to the normal operating mode at any time by going to Cancel and pressing
the Enter button.
The top level structure diagram is shown in Figure 30.
34.5
inH2O
NEXT ENTER
NEXT ENTER
PUSHBUTTON PUSHBUTTON
EXTERNAL ZERO BUTTON

(LATCHED [NONACTIVATING] POSITION)
Figure 29. Local Display Module
31
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 3. Operation Via Local Display
E E
(measurement M1 or M2) (measurement M2 or M1)
N
N
E
RERANGE LOCAL MODE, GO TO RERANGE MENU
N
E
CONFIG LOCAL MODE, GO TO CONFIGURATION MENU
N
E
CALIB OFF-LINE, GO TO CALIBRATION MENU
N
E
VIEW DB ON-LINE MODE
N N STEP THROUGH DATABASE DISPLAY
E
E
TST DSP ON-LINE MODE
N
N STEP THROUGH DISPLAY TEST PATTERN
E
E
CANCEL EXIT MODE SELECT MENU, RETURN TO ON-LINE MODE
N
N = NEXT BUTTON E = ENTER BUTTON
Figure 30. Top Level Structure Diagram
Entering Numerical Values

The general procedure for entering numerical values in Calibration and Configuration is as follows:
1. At the appropriate prompt, press the Enter button. The display shows the last (or default)
value with the first digit flashing.
2. Use the Next button to select the desired first digit, then press the Enter button. Your
selection is entered and the second digit flashes.
3. Repeat Step 2 until you have created your new value. If the number has less than five
characters, use leading or trailing zeros for the remaining spaces. When you have
configured the fifth space, the display prompts you to place the decimal point.
4. Move the decimal point with the Next button until it is where you want it and press the
Enter button.
NOTE
1. The decimal point may not be placed directly after the first digit. For example, you can
not enter a value as 1.2300; you must enter it as 01.230.
2. The decimal position is identified by flashing except at the position after the fifth digit.
At that position (representing a whole number), the decimal point is assumed.
5. The display advances to the next menu item.
Reranging
You can access the Rerange mode in the top level menu (see Figure 30). Entry to the Mode Select
menu is made (from normal operating mode) by pressing the Next button. The display reads
RERANGE. You can then adjust M1 URV and/or M1 LRV in the following two submenus.
32
3. Operation Via Local Display MI IDP10-T – July 2008
NOTE
If M1 MODE is in a square root mode, regardless of engineering units selected,
RERANGE is automatically done in the following “default” pressure units:
• inH2O, if M2 MODE is a type of square root.
• M2 EGU units, if M2 MODE is linear.
The bottom line of the display indicates the “default units” during RERANGE. Following
RERANGE, the display automatically switches back to the configured engineering
units.
M1 URV:
To edit the upper range value, press Enter at the prompt M1 URV. Use the procedure
“Entering Numerical Values” on page 32 section to edit this parameter.
M1 LRV:
Similar to M1URV immediately above.
NOTE
M1 LRV is bypassed if M1 MODE is configured as square root since M1 LRV must be
zero.
Viewing the Database

You can access the View Database mode by the multi-level menu system described above. Entry to
the Mode Select menu is made (from normal operating mode) by pressing the Next button. The dis-
play reads RERANGE. Use the Next button to get to VIEW DB. Acknowledge your choice of this
selection by pressing the Enter button. The display shows the first item in the database. You can step
through the database display by repeated use of the Next button. You can abort this procedure at any
time by pressing the Enter button.
Viewing the Pressure Range

The values of M1LRV and M1 URV can be viewed in VIEW DB as described above.
Testing the Display

You can access the Test Display mode by the same multi-level menu system that was used to enter
Reranging, Calibration, Configuration, and View Database mode. Entry to the Mode Select menu is
made (from normal operating mode) by pressing the Next button. The display reads RERANGE. Use
the Next button to get to TST DSP. Acknowledge your choice of this selection by pressing the Enter
button. The display shows the first test segment pattern. You can step through the five patterns by
repeated use of the Next button. You can abort the test at any time by pressing the Enter button. The
five patterns are shown in Figure 31.
33
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 3. Operation Via Local Display
ALL SEGMENTS ON
ALL SEGMENTS OFF
ALL HORIZONTAL SEGMENTS ON
ALL VERTICAL SEGMENTS ON
ALL DIAGONAL SEGMENTS AND DECIMAL POINTS ON
Figure 31. Display Test Segment Patterns
Error Messages
Table 4. Operation Error Messages
Error
Parameter Condition Tested Message Action
Normal Write Protection WR PROT Displays periodically to notify user that
Operation Enabled unit is in Write Protect.
Any non-On-line OFFLINE Notifies user of a non-On-line condition.
Condition
Startup Database OK or INITERR User should perform SET GDB
corrupted procedure. See “SET GDB:” on page 53.
34
4. Calibration
NOTE
1. For best results in applications where high accuracy is required, rezero the transmitter
output once it has stabilized at the final operating temperature.
2. Zero shifts resulting from position effects and/or static pressure effects can be
eliminated by rezeroing the transmitter output.
3. When checking the zero reading of a transmitter operating in the square root mode,
return the output to the linear mode. This eliminates an apparent instability in the output
signal. Return the transmitter output to the square root mode after the zero check is
complete.
4. After calibrating transmitters operating with a 4 to 20 mA (or 1 to 5 V dc) output signal,
check the underrange and overrange output values to ensure that they extend beyond 4
and 20 mA (or 1 and 5 V dc) respectively.
General Calibration Notes

1. Each transmitter is factory characterized over its full rated pressure range. One benefit of
this process is that every transmitter can measure any applied differential pressure within
its range limits regardless of the calibrated range. The applied differential pressure is
measured and converted into an internal digital value of differential pressure. This digital
value of differential pressure is always available whether the transmitter is calibrated or
not. Calibration assures that the transmitter rated accuracy is achieved over the calibrated
range.
2. The internal digital value of differential pressure can be displayed on the optional local
display, transmitted digitally, and converted to a 4 to 20 mA analog output signal.
3. Each transmitter is factory calibrated to either a specified or a default calibrated range.
This calibration optimizes the accuracy of the internal digital value of differential pressure
over that range. If no range is specified, the default range is zero to the sensor upper
range limit (URL).
4. The transmitter database has configurable values for both Lower Range Value (LRV) and
upper range value (URV). These values are used for two functions.
a. Defining the Calibrated Range When Using Local Pushbuttons for Calibration:
♦ When either CAL LRV or CAL URV is initiated from the local pushbuttons, the
transmitter expects that the differential pressure applied at the time the button is
pressed is equal to the LRV or URV value respectively.
♦ This function trims the internal digital value of differential pressure; that is, it performs
a calibration based on the application of accurate differential pressures equal to the
values entered for LRV and URV in the transmitter database.
♦ This function also sets the 4 and 20 mA output points; that is, the 4 and 20 mA points
correspond to the values of LRV and URV in the database.
♦ The value of LRV can be larger than the value of URV.
b. Reranging Without the Application of Pressure:
♦ Since the transmitter continually determines an internal digital value of the measured
differential pressure from the lower range limit (LRL) to the upper range limit (URL),
the 4 and 20 mA output points can be assigned to any differential pressure values
(within the span and range limits) without application of pressure.
♦ The reranging function is accomplished by entering new database values for LRV and
URV.
35
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 4. Calibration
♦ Reranging does not affect the calibration of the transmitter; that is, it does not affect
the optimization of the internal digital value of differential pressure over a specific
calibrated range.
♦ If the reranged LRV and URV are not within the calibrated range, the measured values
may not be as accurate as when they are within the calibrated range.
If the transmitter is in square root mode for flow rate measurement, the URV in the
database is displayed as the flow rate URV when the view database (VIEW DB) function
is used. However, the LRV and URV in pressure units can be displayed by selecting the
reranging (RERANGE) function. LRV is always zero when the transmitter is configured
for square root mode.
5. When the optional local display is used, the internal digital value of differential pressure is
sent directly to the indicator.
♦ The display can show any measured differential pressure in selected units regardless of
the calibrated range and the values of LRV and URV (within the limits of the transmitter
and display).
♦ If the measured differential pressure is outside the range established by the LRV and URV
values in the database, the display shows the measurement but also continually blinks to
indicate that the measurement is out of range. The mA current signal is saturated at either
the low or high overrange limit respectively but the display continually shows the pressure.
6. When configured for 4 to 20 mA output, the internal digital value of differential pressure is
converted to an analog current signal.
♦ The transmitter sets the output at 4 mA for the LRV and 20 mA for the URV.
♦ There is an independent trim on the digital-to-analog conversion stage. This trim allows for
slight adjustment of the 4 and 20 mA outputs. This compensates for any slight difference
that exists between the transmitter mA output and an external reference device which is
measuring the current.
♦ The mA trim does not affect the calibration or the reranging of the transmitter and does not
affect the internal digital value of differential pressure or the transmission or display of
measured pressure.
♦ The mA trim can be done with or without pressure applied to the transmitter.
7. Zeroing from the local display does not affect the span.
When the transmitter is zeroed to compensate for installed position effect, the transmitter
can have either LRV differential pressure applied (CAL LRV) or zero differential pressure
applied (CAL AT0). If using a zero-based range, either method produces the same result.
However, if the range is not zero-based, it is advantageous to have both methods
available.
For example, consider a differential pressure transmitter having a range of 50 to 100 psig.
If it is not feasible to vent the transmitter to atmosphere for zeroing (or to bypass the high
and low sides for zeroing), it can be zeroed while the LRV differential pressure of 50 psi is
applied by using the CAL LRV function. On the other hand, if the transmitter has been
installed but there is no pressure in the process line yet (or the high and low sides can be
connected by a bypass valve), it can be zeroed while open to atmosphere (or bypassed)
by using the CAL AT0 function.
a. Zeroing with LRV Pressure Applied (CAL LRV):
♦ Before using this zeroing function, apply a differential pressure to the transmitter equal
to the value of LRV stored in the transmitter database.
♦ When you zero the transmitter, the internal digital value of differential pressure is
trimmed to be equal to the value of LRV stored in the database and the mA output set
to 4 mA.
36
4. Calibration MI IDP10-T – July 2008
♦ If zeroing is done when the applied differential pressure is different from the LRV value
in the database, the internal digital value of differential pressure is biased by the
difference in the values but the output is still set at 4 mA.
♦ The CAL LRV and CAL URV function should be used when calibrating a transmitter
for a specific range with known input differential pressures applied for the LRV and
URV.
b. Zeroing with Zero Pressure Applied (CAL AT0):
♦ Make sure that the applied differential pressure is at zero. This means venting the
transmitter to atmosphere or opening a bypass valve to connect high and low sides.
♦ When you zero the transmitter, the internal digital value of the differential pressure is
trimmed to be equal to zero and the mA output set to an appropriate value such that the
mA output is a nominal 4 mA when the LRV pressure is applied later.
Calibration Setup
The following sections show setups for field or bench calibration. Use test equipment that is at least
three times as accurate as the desired accuracy of the transmitter.
NOTE
It is not necessary to set up calibration equipment to rerange the transmitter to a
different range. The transmitter can be accurately reranged by simply changing the
lower range value and the upper range value, which are stored in the transmitter
database.
Setup of Electronic Equipment
VOLTMETER POWER SUPPLY
(+)
(–) (–) (+) (–) (+)
250 Ω PRECISION RESISTOR
Resistor: 250 Ω, ±0.01%, 1 W minimum (Part No. E0309GY)

PC-BASED
Power supply: Refer to Figure 25
CONFIGURATOR,
OR HART Digital Voltmeter: readings from 1.000 to 5.000 V dc
COMMUNICATOR
Figure 32. 4 to 20 mA Output Calibration Setup of Electronic Equipment
Field Calibration Setup

Field calibration is performed without disconnecting the process piping. In order to do this, you must
have a bypass and shutoff valves between the process and the transmitter and one of the following:
♦ Access to the process connections on the nonprocess side of the transmitter
♦ The optional vent screw in the side of the process covers.
If the transmitter is to be removed from the process for calibration, refer to “Bench Calibration Setup”
below.
37
For field calibration, an adjustable air supply and a pressure measuring device are required. For exam-
ple, a dead weight tester or an adjustable clean air supply and pressure gauge can be used. The pres-
sure source can be connected to the transmitter process connection with pipe fittings or it can be
connected to the vent screw assembly using a calibration screw. The calibration screw has a Polyflo
fitting and can be used for pressures up to 700 kPa (100 psi). It is available from Invensys Process
Systems as Part Number F0101ES.
To set up the equipment, refer to Figure 33 and use the following procedure.
1. If the transmitter is in operation, follow the “Taking a Differential Pressure Transmitter Out
of Operation” on page 30.
! CAUTION
With liquid service, drain both sides of transmitter to avoid calibration errors.
2. If a calibration screw is being used, remove the vent screw and replace it with the
calibration screw. Connect the pressure source to the calibration screw using 6 x 1 mm or
0.250 inch tubing.
If a calibration screw is not being used, remove the entire vent screw assembly or drain
plug (as applicable) from the high pressure side of the transmitter. Connect calibration
tubing using a suitable thread sealant.
3. Close the bypass valve opened in Step 1.
4. Complete the setup shown in Figure 33.
NOTE
For vacuum applications, connect the calibrating pressure source to the low pressure
side of the transmitter.
5. If calibrating the output signal, also connect equipment as shown in Figure 32.
BYPASS VALVE HIGH PRESSURE SIDE
SHUTOFF VALVES CALIBRATING

PRESSURE
SOURCE
Note: Alternate connection point for calibrating
equipment is optional vent screw (not shown) on BLEEDER VALVES
high pressure side cover. (NEEDLE TYPE)
Figure 33. Field Calibration Setup
Bench Calibration Setup

The bench calibration setup requires disconnecting the process piping. For calibration setup without
disconnecting the process piping, refer to “Field Calibration Setup” above.
38
The bench calibration setup is shown in Figure 34. Connect the input piping to the high pressure side
of the transmitter as shown. Vent the low pressure side of the transmitter.
NOTE
For vacuum applications, connect the calibrating pressure source to the low pressure
side of the transmitter.
If calibrating the output signal, also connect equipment as shown in Figure 32.
HIGH PRESSURE SIDE

BYPASS VALVE
SHUTOFF VALVES
CALIBRATING
PRESSURE
SOURCE
BLEEDER VALVES
(NEEDLE TYPE)
Figure 34. Bench Calibration Setup
Calibration Using a PC20

To calibrate the transmitter using a PC20 Configurator, follow the procedure in MI 020-495.
Calibration Using a PC50

To calibrate the transmitter using a PC50 Configurator, follow the procedure in MI 020-501 and
MI 020-505.
Calibration Using a HART Communicator

To calibrate the transmitter using a HART Communicator, follow the procedure in MI 020-366.
Calibration Using the Optional Local Display

To access the Calibration mode (from normal operating mode), press the Next button. The display
reads CALIB, the first item on the menu. Acknowledge your choice of this selection by pressing the
Enter button. The display shows the first item in the Calibration menu.
NOTE
1. During calibration, a single change could affect several parameters. For this reason, if
an entry is entered in error, re-examine the entire database or use the Cancel feature to
restore the transmitter to its starting configuration and begin again.
39
2. During adjustment of 4 and 20 mA in the Calibration menu, the milliampere output

does not reflect live measurement values.
Table 5. Calibration Menu
Item Description
CAL AT0 Calibrate at zero pressure.
CAL LRV Calibrate with pressure at 0% of transmitter range (LRV).
CAL URV Calibrate with pressure at 100% of transmitter range
(URV).
ADJ 4mA Adjust nominal 4 mA output.
ADJ20mA Adjust nominal 20 mA output.
CALDATE Enter the calibration date.
ADJ 4mA causes the following four submenus.
A 4mA∆∆ Increase 4 mA output by large step.
A 4mA∇∇ Decrease 4 mA output by large step.
A 4mA∆ Increase 4 mA output by small step.
A 4mA∇ Decrease 4 mA output by small step.
ADJ 20mA causes the following four submenus.
A 20mA∆∆ Increase 20 mA output by large step.
A 20mA∇∇ Decrease 20 mA output by large step.
A 20mA∆ Increase 20 mA output by small step.
A 20mA∇ Decrease 20 mA output by small step.
NOTE
It is not necessary to use the ADJ4mA or ADJ20mA menu selections (commonly
known as mA Trim) unless there is a plant requirement to make the 4 and 20 mA output
values exactly match readings on certain plant calibration equipment and the calibration
operations done result in a small but unacceptable difference between the transmitter
mA output and the test equipment mA readout values.
Proceed to calibrate your transmitter by using the Next key to select your item and the Enter key to
specify your selection per Figures 35 and 36. At any point in the calibration you can Cancel, restore
your prior calibration and return to the on-line mode or Save your new calibration.
40
E E
CAL AT0 AT0 DONE CAL AT0: To set or reset the zero point at zero
N N pressure, apply zero differential pressure to the
E
transmitter and, at display of CAL AT0, press
E Enter. This can be done whether LRV is zero or
CAL LRV LRV DONE
N N
not. Completion is indicated by the display
AT0 Done.
E E
CAL URV URV DONE
E = ENTER
N N CAL LRV: To set or reset 0% of range input, apply
N = NEXT
differential pressure to the transmitter equal to the
ADJ 4mA lower range value (LRV) in the transmitter data-
E base and, at display of CAL LRV, press Enter.
Completion is indicated by the display LRV Done.
E
A 4mA∆∆ A 4mA∆∆
E
N N CAL URV: To set or reset 100% of range input,
E apply differential pressure to the transmitter equal
A 4mA∇∇ A 4mA∇∇ to the upper range value (URV) in the transmitter
N N N E database and, at display of CAL URV, press
Enter. Completion is indicated by the display URV
E
A 4mA∆ A 4mA∆ Done.
N N E
E ADJ4mA: If you configured your transmitter oper-

A 4mA∇ A 4mA∇ ating mode as 4 to 20 mA, you can adjust the
N N E 4 mA output by going to ADJ4mA using the Next
button and press Enter. This menu item is
bypassed if you configured your transmitter for
ADJ20mA multidrop mode (poll address other than zero).
E
E To increase the 4 mA output by a large (0.025 mA)

A 20mA∆∆ A 20mA∆∆
step, press Enter at the display A 4mA∆∆. To
N N E decrease it by a large step, go to the display A
E 4mA∇∇ by pressing the Next button and then
A 20mA∇∇ A 20mA∇∇ Enter. To increase it by a small (0.001 mA) step,
N N E go to the display A 4mA∆ with the Next button
N and then press Enter. To decrease it by a small
E
A 20mA∆ A 20mA∆ step, go to the display A 4mA∇ with the Next but-
N N E ton and then press Enter.
E
A 20mA∇ A 20mA∇ ADJ20mA: Similar to ADJ4mA.
N N E
CALDATE
(continued on next figure)
Figure 35. Calibration Structure Diagram
41
(CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS FIGURE)
E
CALDATE
N
Display Day Increment Day
E
N
N Display Month Increment Month
E
N
Display Year Increment Year
E
E
CANCEL Discard all changes, return to ONLINE.
N
E
SAVE Save database changes, return to ONLINE.
N
*If character is not the last position on the display line, advances to next character.
**If character is the last position on the display line, advances to next menu item.
NOTE: Commentary about this diagram immediately follows.
Figure 36. Calibration Structure Diagram (Continued)
Commentary on Figure 36
CALDATE:
This is not a required entry but can be used for recordkeeping or plant maintenance purposes.
To edit the calibration date, go to CALDATE with the Next button and press Enter. You then
can change the day, month, and year. The display shows the last date with the day flashing.
Use the Next button to step through the menu of digits to select the desired day, then press
Enter. Repeat this process for the month and year.
Zero Adjustment Using External Zero Button
An optional external zero adjustment mechanism in the electronics housing allows calibration at zero
differential pressure (the CAL AT0 function) or at the lower range value differential pressure (the
CAL LRV function) without removing the electronics compartment cover. The mechanism is magneti-
cally activated through the housing wall to prevent moisture from entering the enclosure.
NOTE
Do not use CAL AT0 if pressure seals are used that are at different elevations from the
transmitter.
To use this feature:

1. Unlatch the external zero button by turning it 90° in a counterclockwise direction so that
the screwdriver slot lines up with the two holes in the face of the adjacent part. Do not
push the button in with the screwdriver while doing this.
2. To set or reset the zero point at zero differential pressure, apply zero differential pressure
to the transmitter or use a bypass valve to equalize pressure on both sides of the
42
transmitter. Press the external zero button until the display reads CAL AT0. Release the
button. The display reads CAL WAIT and then RESET (calibration is complete).
To set or reset the 0% of range input, apply the lower range value (LRV) differential
pressure to the transmitter and press and hold the external zero button until the display
reads CAL LRV (it reads CAL AT0 first). Release the button. The display reads
CAL WAIT and then RESET (calibration is complete).
NOTE
If the optional display is not present, the same functions can be accomplished by
depending on the length of time the external zero button is depressed. Press and hold
the button for 1 to 3 seconds for CAL AT0 or for 5 or more seconds for CAL LRV.
Therefore, if your LRV is zero, just depress the button for a few seconds. However, if
your LRV is not zero, use caution when using the external zero button without the
optional display because you must rely strictly on the length of time the button is
depressed to differentiate between CAL AT0 and CAL LRV.
Other possible messages are:

DISABLD if EX ZERO is configured EXZ DIS
IGNORED if the transmitter is not in the on-line mode.
WP ENAB if write protection jumper is in write protect position.
If additional rezeroing is required after Steps 1 and 2 have been accomplished, repeat
Step 2.
3. Relatch the external zero button by turning it 90° in a clockwise direction to prevent
accidental pressing of the button. Do not push the button in with the screwdriver while
doing this.
43
Error Messages
Table 6. Calibration Error Messages
Error
Parameter Condition Tested Message User Action
Password Password BAD PWD Bad password entered, use another.
Protection
Write Write protection REJECT Displays when user attempts an action that
Protection enabled is write protected.
ZERO Internal offset too large BADZERO Check applied pressure, configured
M1 LRV and configured M1 EOFF.
SPAN Slope too large or too BADSPAN Check applied pressure, configured
small M1 LRV and configured M1 EFAC.
M1 URV M1URV > max pressure URV>FMX Entered pressure is greater than maximum
in EGU rated pressure of transmitter. Check entry.
Verify EGUs.
M1URV < min pressure URV<FMN Entered pressure is less than minimum rated
in EGU pressure of transmitter. Check entry. Verify
EGUs.
M1 URV = M1 LRV LRV=URV Cannot set span to 0. Check entry. Check
M1 LRV.
M1 turndown exceeds BADTDWN Check entry. Check M1 LRV.
limit
URV < 0 with M1 or M2 URV<LRV Square root mode with nonzero LRV is not
SqRt valid. Change LRV to 0.
M1 LRV M1LRV > max pressure LRV>FMX Entered pressure is greater than maximum
in EGU rated pressure of transmitter. Check entry.
Verify EGUs.
M1LRV < min pressure LRV<FMN Entered pressure is less than minimum rated
EGUs.
M1 URV = M1 LRV LRV=URV Cannot set span to 0. check entry. Check M1
URV.
M1 turndown exceeds BADTDWN Check entry. Check M1 URV.
limit
44
5. Configuration
Configurable Parameters
Table 7 lists all the configurable parameters and the factory default for the IDP10-T Transmitters. The
factory default values have been customized if the transmitter was ordered with optional feature -C2.
The table also shows which parameters are configurable with the integral vs. remote configurators.
Table 7. IDP10-T Configurable Parameters
Configurable with
Factory Integ. Remote Application
Parameter Capability Default Indic. Config. Requirement
Descriptors
Tag Number 8 characters max Tag Number No Yes
Descriptor 16 characters max Tag Name No Yes
Message 32 characters max Inst Location No Yes
Input
Calibrated Range LRV to URV in units listed See (b) below Yes Yes
in (a) below when not specified
per S.O.
Output
Measurement #1 Output 4 to 20 mA or Fixed 4 to 20 mA Yes Yes
(PV) Current. Specify Poll
Address (1-15) for Fixed
Current.
Measurement #1 Mode Linear or type of square Linear Yes Yes
root in (d) below
Measurement #1 EGUs If linear, select from units Units of Calibrated Yes Yes
listed in (a) below; Range
If Sq.Rt., select from units
listed in (c) below
Measurement #2 Mode Linear or type of square Linear Yes Yes
(SV) root in (d) below
Measurement #2 EGUs If linear, select from units Units of Calibrated Yes Yes
listed in (a) below; Range
If Sq.Rt., select from units
listed in (c) below
Temp. Sensor Fail Strategy Normal oper. or failsafe Fail-safe Yes
Fail-safe High or Low High Yes Yes
External Zero Enabled or Disabled Enabled Yes Yes
Damping 0 to 32 seconds. None Yes Yes
Poll Address 0 - 15 0 Yes Yes
LCD Indicator (e) Meas #1 EGU or % Lin Meas #1 EGU Yes No
(a) psi, inHg, ftH2O, inH2O, atm, bar, mbar, MPa, kPa, Pa, kg/cm2, g/cm2, mmHg, torr, mmH2O.
(b) Span Code A: 0 to 30 inH2O; Span Code B: 0 to 200 inH2O; Span Code C: 0 to 30 psi;
Span Code D: 0 to 300 psi; Span Code E: 0 to 3000 psi.
(c) gal/s, gal/m, gal/h, gal/d, Mgal/d, ft3/s, ft3/m, ft3/h, ft3/d, Igal/s, Igal/m, Igal/h, Igal/d, l/s, l/m, l/h, Ml/d, m3/s, m3/m,
m3/h, m3/d, bbl/s, bbl/m, bbl/h, bbl/d, %flow.
(d) Square root with cutoff below 1% of calibrated pressure range or with linear below 4% of calibrated pressure
range.
(e) Measurement #2 can be displayed at any time by pressing the Enter button regardless of the local display
configuration. This reverts to Measurement #1 or % Lin (as configured) when power is cycled off and on.
45
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 5. Configuration
Configuration Using a PC20

To configure the transmitter using a PC20 Configurator, follow the procedure in MI 020-495.
Configuration Using a PC50

To configure the transmitter using a PC50 Configurator, follow the procedure in MI 020-501 and
MI 020-505.
Configuration Using a HART Communicator

To configure the transmitter using a HART Communicator, follow the procedure in MI 020-366.
Configuration Using the Optional Local Display

You can access the Configuration mode by the same multi-level menu system that was used to enter
Calibration mode. Entry to the Mode Select menu is made (from normal operating mode) by pressing
the Next button. The display reads CALIB, the first item on the menu. Press the Next button again to
get to the second item on the menu, CONFIG. Acknowledge your choice of this selection by pressing
the Enter button. The display shows the first item in the Configuration menu. You can then configure
items shown in Table 8. The standard factory default configuration is also given in this table.
The standard factory default configuration is not used if custom configuration option -C2 has been
specified. Option -C2 is a full factory configuration of all parameters to the user’s specifications.
NOTE
1. You can configure most parameters using the local display. However, for more
complete configuration capability, use a HART Communicator or PC-Based configurator.
2. During configuration, a single change can affect several parameters. For this reason,
if an entry is entered in error, re-examine the entire database or use the Cancel feature
to restore the transmitter to its starting configuration and begin again.
Table 8. Configuration Menu
Initial Factory
Item Description Configuration
POLLADR Poll Address: 0 - 15 0
EX ZERO(a) External Zero: enable or disable Enable
S2 FAIL Temperature Sensor Failure Strategy: S2FATAL or S2NOFTL S2FATAL
OUT DIR 4 to 20 mA Output: forward or reverse Forward
OUTFAIL 4 to 20 mA Output: fail mode output - low or high High
OFFL MA 4 to 20 mA Output in offline mode - last or user set USER MA
DAMPING Damping: none, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds None
M1 MODE Output: linear or type of square root(b) Linear
M1DISP Local Indicator Display in linear mode: in percent or M1EGU
engineering units
M1 EGU User-Defined Engineering Units inH2O or psi
M1 URV Primary Upper Range Value URL
M1 LRV Primary Lower Range Value 0
M2 MODE Output: linear or type of square root Linear
M2 EGU User-Defined Engineering Units Same as M1 EGU
DISPLAY Display M1, M2, or Toggle between M1 and M2 M1
CALDATE Calibration Date ---
46
5. Configuration MI IDP10-T – July 2008
Table 8. Configuration Menu (Continued)
Initial Factory
Item Description Configuration
ENA PWD Enable password; no password, configuration only, or NO PWD
configuration and calibration
CFG PWD User set configuration password (six characters) ---
CAL PWD User set calibration password (six characters) ---
SET GDB Rewrite all calibration and configuration values with default ---
values
(a) Applies only if transmitter contains External Zero option.
(b) Square root is not applicable to absolute pressure, gauge pressure, and flange level measurement.
Proceed to configure your transmitter by using the Next button to select your item and the Enter but-
ton to specify your selection per the following three figures. At any point in the configuration you can
Cancel your changes and return to the on-line mode, or Save your changes.
47
E N N N
POLLADR 0 1 2 15
N E E E E
E N
EX ZERO EXZ DIS EXZ ENA
N E E NOTES:
1. OUTFAIL sets mA output to go
either High or Low under certain
E N failure conditions, such as a sensor
S2 FAIL S2 FATAL S2 NOFTL
failure.
N E E 2. Square root functions should not
be selected on absolute and gauge
pressure or level transmitters.
E N
OUT DIR(a) OUT FWD OUT REV
3. LIN PCT provides percent output
N E E on LCD indicator only (linear mode).
Percent flow in square root is selectable
under MI EGU.
E N
OUTFAIL FAIL LO FAIL HI
N E E
E N E Display N Implement
OFFL MA LAST MA USER MA
Digit Digit
N E E
E N N N
DAMPING NO DAMP DAMP 1/4 DAMP 1/2 DAMP 32
N E E E E
N
E N N N
M1 MODE M1 LIN M1SQ<1C M1SQ<4L M1SQ<nC
N E E E E
N
Display Digit Increment Digit
E
** *
(a) Linear Mode only.

Figure 37. Configuration Structure Diagram
48
(continued from previous figure)
E N
M1 DISP(a) M1 EGU LIN PCT
E E
N
N
E N N N
M1 EGU gal/s gal/m gal/h %flow
E E E E
N
N
or
N N
inH20 inHg atm
E E E
E N
M1EOFF Display Digit Increment Digit
N E
** *
E N
M1EFAC Display Digit Increment Digit
E
N
** *
E N
M1 URV Display Digit Increment Digit
N E
** *
N
E N
M1 LRV Display Digit Increment Digit
N E
** *
E
M2 MODE Similar to M1 MODE
N
E (a) Linear Mode only.
M2 EGU Similar to M1 EGU
N
DISPLAY
Figure 38. Configuration Structure Diagram (Continued)
49
(continued from previous figure)
E N N
DISPLAY SHOW M1 SHOW M2 TOGGLE
E E E
E
CALDATE
N
Display Day Increment Day
E
N
N Display Month Increment Month
E
N
Display Year Increment Year
E
E N
ENA PWD NO PWDS CFGONLY CFG+CAL
E E E
CFG PWD CAL PWD
N or E N or E
Display N Increment
Character Character Display N Increment
E Character Character
** *
E
CFG PWD
N or E
E E Display N Increment
SET GDB CLEAR DB Performs Reset Character Character
and returns
N N E
to ONLINE ** *
CANCEL Discard all changes, return to ONLINE

N
SAVE Save database changes, return to ONLINE
N
Figure 39. Configuration Structure Diagram (Continued)
50
Commentary on Configuration Structure Diagram

In general, use the Next button to select your item and the Enter button to specify your selection.
POLLADR:
To configure the transmitter poll address, press Enter. Use the Next button to select an
address of 0 through 15, then press Enter. An address of 1 through 15 is used for multidrop
mode with a fixed mA output.
EX ZERO:
The External Zero feature allows the optional external zero pushbutton to be disabled for
additional security. To configure this feature, go to EX ZERO with the Next button and press
Enter. Use the Next button to select EXZ DIS or EXZ ENA and press Enter.
S2 FAIL:
The temperature sensor compensates for changes in temperature in the transmitter
electronics. Failure of this sensor can cause a 4 to 20 mA accuracy change of up to 0.25%.
The S2 FAIL feature allows you to specify action (or no action) if such a failure occurs. To
configure this feature, go to S2 FAIL with the Next button and press Enter. Use the Next
button to select S2 FATAL (to have the output go to that configured in OUTFAIL) or S2
NOFTL (to continue operation with a temperature sensor failure). This parameter has no
effect if POLLADR is configured to any number from 1 through 15 and is bypassed if M1
MODE or M2 MODE is configured as square root.
OUT DIR:
To configure the Output Direction, go to OUT DIR with the Next button and press Enter. Use
the Next button to select OUT FWD (4 - 20 mA) or OUT REV (20 - 4 mA) and press Enter.
This parameter has no effect if POLLADR is configured to any number from 1 through 15
and is bypassed if M1 MODE or M2 MODE is configured as square root.
OUTFAIL:
The Outfail feature provides high or low output with certain malfunctions. To configure the fail
mode output, go to OUTFAIL with the Next button and press Enter. Use the Next button to
select FAIL LO or FAIL HI and press Enter. This parameter has no effect if POLLADR is
configured to any number from 1 through 15.
OFFL MA:
The Off-line mA feature enables you to set the output to a specified value or to the last value if
the transmitter goes off-line. To configure the off-line output, go to OFFL MA with the Next
button and press Enter. Use the Next button to select LAST MA or USER MA and press
Enter. If you selected USER MA, press Enter again at the display of digits. Then use the
Next button to step through the library of digits to select the desired first digit, then press
Enter. Your selection is entered and the second character flashes. Repeat this procedure until
you have entered the last digit. Then use the Next button to move the decimal point to its
desired location and press Enter. The display advances to the next menu item.
DAMPING:
To configure additional damping, go to DAMPING with the Next button and press Enter.
Use the NEXT button to select NO DAMP, DAMP 1/4, DAMP 1/2, DAMP 1, DAMP 2,
DAMP 4, DAMP 8, DAMP 16, or DAMP 32 and press Enter.
M1 MODE:
To configure the mode of the primary output (PV), go to M1 MODE with the Next button and
press Enter. Use the Next button to select M1 LIN (linear), M1SQ<1C (square root with
cutoff below 1% dp (M1 URV in linear units of dp), M1SQ<4L (square root with linear below
4% of dp (M1 URV in linear units of dp), or M1SQ<nC (square root with user configured cutoff
specified between 0 and 20% of the flow upper range value, M1 EFAC) and press Enter. You
cannot configure this parameter as square root if OUT DIR was configured as OUT REV or if
M1LRV is not zero.
51
NOTE
Cutoff in M1SQ<1C and M1SQ<4L is in percent of differential pressure but cutoff in
M1SQ<nC is in percent of flow rate.
M1 DISP:
To configure the optional local indicator to show engineering units or percent in linear mode,
go to M1 DISP with the Next button and press Enter. Use the Next button to select
M1 EGU or LIN PCT and press Enter. LIN PCT only provides percent readings on the local
display. The M1 engineering unit is used for remote communication of Measurement #1, even
if LIN PCT is selected.
M1 EGU:
To configure pressure or flow engineering units for your display and transmission, go to
M1 EGU with the Next button and press Enter. If M1 MODE is configured as M1 LIN, you
are asked to specify one of the following pressure labels: psi, inHg, ftH2O, inH2O, atm,
bar, mbar, MPa, Pa, kPa, kg/cm2, g/cm2, mmHg, torr, mmH2O, mH2O. or hW60
(inH2O at 60°F). Your transmitter then automatically adjusts M1EFAC (engineering factor),
M1 URV (upper range value), and M1 LRV (lower range value). M1EOFF is set to zero.
If M1 MODE is configured as M1 SQ<1C, M1SQ<4L, or M1 SQ<nC, you are asked to
specify one of the following flow labels: %flow, gal/s, gal/m, gal/h, gal/d, Mgal/d, ft3/s,
ft3/m, ft3/h, ft3/d, Igal/s, Igal/m, Igal/h, Igal/d, l/s, l/m, l/h, Ml/d, m3/s, m3/m, m3/h,
m3/d, bbl/s, bbl/m, bbl/h, bbl/d, T/h, lb/h, kg/h, Nm3/h (normal m3/h), Sm3/h (standard
m3/h), Am3/h (actual m3/h), or MMSCFD (million scfd). Check the M1EFAC (engineering
factor) and, if necessary, adjust it as follows:
M1EFAC:
This parameter is used to input the numerical relationship between the measured span in
pressure units and the displayed (and transmitted) span in flow units. It is the displayed URV in
flow units (which is also the span in flow units since flow ranges must be zero-based).
Example:
For a 200 inH2O transmitter with a measured range of 0 to 100 inH2O and displayed range of
0 to 500 gal/m, M1EFAC = 500.
To edit the span in your configured flow units, press Enter at the prompt M1EFAC. Use the
procedure “Entering Numerical Values” on page 32 to edit this parameter.
M1 URV:
To edit the upper range value, press Enter at the prompt M1 URV. Use the procedure
“Entering Numerical Values” on page 32 section to edit this parameter.
M1 LRV:
Similar to M1URV immediately above.
NOTE
M1 LRV is bypassed if M1 MODE is configured as square root since M1 LRV must be
zero.
M2 MODE:
M2 is a secondary measurement (SV) that is read by the HART Communicator and can be
displayed on the optional display. You might use this feature to display M1 in flow units and M2
in comparable pressure units. To configure this parameter, go to M2 MODE with the Next
button and press Enter. Use the Next button to select M2 LIN (linear), M2SQ<1C (square
root with cutoff below 1% dp (M2 URV in linear units of dp), M2SQ<4L (square root with linear
below 4% of dp (M2 URV in linear units of dp), or M2SQ<nC (square root with cutoff specified
between 0 and 20% of the flow upper range value, M2 EFAC) and press Enter.
52
M2 EGU:
Similar to M1 EGU.
DISPLAY:
To display M1, M2, or to toggle between M1 and M2, go to DISPLAY with the Next button
and press Enter. Use the Next button to select SHOW M1, SHOW M2, or TOGGLE and
press Enter.
CALDATE:
This is not a required entry but can be used for record-keeping or plant maintenance
purposes. To edit the calibration date, go to CALDATE with the Next button and press
Enter. You then can change the day, month, and year. The display shows the last date with
the day flashing. Use the Next button to step through the library of digits to select the desired
day, then press Enter. Repeat this process for the month and year.
ENA PWD:
To enable or disable the password feature, go to ENA PWD with the Next button and press
Enter. Use the Next button to select NO PWDS (password not required for either calibration
or configuration), CFGONLY (password required to configure but not to calibrate), or
CFG+CAL (passwords required to both configure and calibrate) and press Enter.
If you selected CFG ONLY, the display changes to CFG PWD. Press either the Next or
Enter button. Use the Next button to step through the library of characters to select the
desired first character, then press Enter. Your selection is entered and the second character
flashes. Repeat this procedure until you have created your password. If the password has less
than six characters, use blanks for the remaining spaces. When you have configured the sixth
space, the display advances to the next menu item.
If you selected CFG+CAL, the display changes to CAL PWD. To create the Calibration
password, press either the Next or Enter button. Use the Next button to step through the
library of characters to select the desired first character, then press Enter. Your selection is
entered and the second character flashes. Repeat this procedure until you have created your
password. If the password has less than six characters, use blanks for the remaining spaces.
When you have configured the sixth space, the display advances to CFG PWD. Use the
same procedure to create the configuration password.
NOTE
In normal operation, the CAL PWD allows access to only calibration mode. The
CFG PWD allows access to both configuration and calibration.
! CAUTION
Record your new password before saving changes to the database.
SET GDB:
If your transmitter database becomes corrupted and you receive an INITERR message upon
startup, this function enables you to rewrite all calibration and configuration values with default
values.
! CAUTION
Any calibration and configuration values that you have entered will be lost. Therefore,
SET GDB should not be selected if your transmitter is functioning normally.
53
Character Lists
Table 9. Alphanumeric Character List
Character List*
@ ‘
, (comma) (
A-Z (uppercase) )
[ *
\ +
] -
^ .
_ (underscore) /
space 0-9
! :
“ ;
# <
$ >
% =
& ?
*List only applies to Model 275 HART Communicator not to optional local display.
Table 10. Numeric Character List
Character List
–
. (decimal point)
0 through 9
54
Error Messages
Table 11. Configuration Error Messages
Parameter Condition Tested Error Message User Action

Password Password BAD PWD Bad password entered, use another.
Protection
Write Write Protection REJECT Displays when user attempts an action that is
Protection Enabled write protected.
M1 MODE M1 LRV ≠ 0 LRVnot0 Square root mode with nonzero LRV is not valid.
(being Change M1 LRV to 0.
changed to M1 URV < 0 URV<LRV Square root mode with negative URV is not valid.
square root) Change M1 URV to positive value.
OUT DIR is OUT REV URV<LRV Square root mode with URV < LRV is not valid.
Change M1 LRV to 0 and M1 URV to positive
value.
M1EFAC < 0 -M1EFAC Negative M1 EFAC is not valid. Change
M1 EFAC to positive value.
M1EFAC = 0 0M1EFAC M1 EFAC = 0 is not valid. Change
M1EOFF ≠ 0 or BADEOFF Square root mode with nonzero
M2EOFF ≠ 0 M1 EOFF and M2 EOFF is not valid. Change
M1 EOFF and M2 EOFF to 0.
M1EFAC M1EFAC < 0 -M1EFAC Negative M1 EFAC is not valid. Change
M1 URV M1URV > max URV>FMX Entered pressure is greater than maximum rated
pressure in EGU pressure of transmitter. Check entry. Verify
EGUs.
M1URV < min pressure URV<FMN Entered pressure is less than minimum rated
EGUs.
M1 LRV.
M1 turndown exceeds BADTDWN Check entry. Check M1 LRV.
limit
URV <0 with M1 or M2 URV<LRV Square root mode with nonzero LRV is not valid.
SqRt Change M1 LRV to 0.
55
Table 11. Configuration Error Messages (Continued)
Parameter Condition Tested Error Message User Action

M1 LRV M1LRV > max pressure LRV>FMX Entered pressure is greater than maximum rated
EGUs.
M1LRV < min pressure LRV<FMN Entered pressure is less than minimum rated
EGUs.
M1 URV.
M1 turndown exceeds BADTDWN Check entry. Check M1 URV.
limit
M2 MODE M1 LRV ≠ 0 LRVnot0 Square root mode with nonzero LRV is not valid.
(being Change M1 LRV to 0.
changed to M1 URV < 0 URV<LRV Square root mode with negative URV is not valid.
square root) Change M1 URV to positive value.
OUT DIR is OUT REV URV<LRV Square root mode with URV < LRV is not valid.
Change M1 LRV to 0 and M1 URV to positive
value.
M1EOFF ≠ 0 or BADEOFF Square root mode with nonzero
M2EOFF ≠ 0 M1 EOFF and M2 EOFF is not valid. Change
M1 EOFF and M2 EOFF to 0.
M2EFAC M2EFAC < 0 -M2EFAC Negative M2 EFAC is not valid. Change
56
6. Maintenance
! DANGER
For nonintrinsically safe installations, to prevent a potential explosion in a Division 1
hazardous area, de-energize transmitters before you remove threaded housing covers.
Failure to comply with this warning could result in an explosion resulting in severe injury or
death.
Error Messages
For error messages displayed on the HART Communicator refer to MI 020-366.
Parts Replacement
Parts replacement is generally limited to the electronics module assembly, housing assembly, sensor
assembly, terminal block assembly, cover O-rings, and optional display. For part numbers relating to
the transmitter and its options, see PL 009-005.
Replacing the Terminal Block Assembly

1. Turn off transmitter power source.
2. Remove the Field Terminals and the Electronics compartment covers by rotating them
counterclockwise. Screw in cover lock if applicable.
3. Remove the digital display (if applicable) as follows: grasp the two tabs on the display and
rotate it about 10° in a counterclockwise direction.
4. Remove the electronics module from the housing by loosening the two captive screws that
secure it to the housing. Then pull the module out of the housing far enough to gain
access to the cable connectors on the rear of the module.
5. Remove the four socket head screws securing the terminal block.
6. Disconnect the terminal block cable connector from the electronics module.
7. Remove the terminal block and the gasket under it.
8. Connect the new terminal block cable connector to the electronics module.
9. Install the new terminal block and new gasket and reinstall the four screws to 0.67 N⋅m
(6 in⋅lb) in several even increments.
10. Reinstall the electronics module (and digital display if applicable).
11. Reinstall the covers onto the housing by rotating them clockwise to seat the O-ring into the
housing and then continue to hand tighten until the each cover contacts the housing
metal-to-metal. If cover locks are present, lock the cover per the procedure described in
“Cover Locks” on page 24.
12. Turn on transmitter power source.
Replacing the Electronics Module Assembly

To replace the electronics module assembly, refer to Figure 40 and proceed as follows:
2. Remove the electronics compartment cover by rotating it counterclockwise. Screw in cover
lock if applicable.
3. Remove the digital display (if applicable) as follows: grasp the two tabs on the display and
rotate it about 10° in a counterclockwise direction. Pull out the display and disconnect its
cable.
57
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 6. Maintenance
4. Remove the electronics module from the housing by loosening the two captive screws that
secure it to the housing. Then pull the module out of the housing far enough to gain
access to the cable connectors on the rear of the module.
! CAUTION
The electronics module is “one assembly” at this point and is electrically and mechanically
connected to topworks with a flexible ribbon signal cable, a 2-wire power cable, and in
some cases, a cable for an external zero pushbutton. Do not exceed the slack available in
these cables when removing the assembled module.
5. Unplug all cable connectors from the rear of the electronics module and place the module
on a clean surface.
6. Predetermine connector orientation, then insert the cable connectors into the replacement
module. Replace the module in the housing using care not to pinch the cables between
the module and the housing. Tighten the two screws that secure the module to the
housing.
7. Connect the cable from the digital display to the electronics module. Ensure that the O-ring
is fully seated in the display housing. Then, holding the digital display by the tabs at the
sides of the display, insert it into the housing. Secure the display to the housing by aligning
the tabs on the sides of the assembly and rotating it about 10° in a clockwise direction.
8. Reinstall the cover onto the housing by rotating it clockwise to seat the O-ring into the
housing and then continue to hand tighten until the cover contacts the housing metal-to-
metal. If cover locks are present, lock the cover per the procedure described in “Cover
Locks” on page 24.
The module replacement procedure is now complete.
HOUSING ASSEMBLY
TO REMOVE ELECTRONICS
MODULE, REMOVE TWO
CROSS RECESS SCREWS.
TO REMOVE DISPLAY FROM

ELECTRONICS MODULE,
TWIST DISPLAY COUNTER-
CLOCKWISE TO RELEASE
TABS AND PULL OUT, THEN
UNPLUG CABLE CONNECTOR.
Figure 40. Replacing the Electronics Module Assembly and Display
58
6. Maintenance MI IDP10-T – July 2008
Removing and Reinstalling a Housing Assembly

To remove and reinstall a housing assembly, refer to Figure 40 and proceed as follows:
1. Remove the electronics module per Steps 1 through 5 in the previous procedure.
2. Remove the housing by rotating it counterclockwise (when viewed from the top) using
caution to avoid damaging the ribbon cables.
3. Inspect the sensor O-ring and lubricate if necessary with silicone lubricant (Part Number
0048130 or equivalent).
4. Reinstall the housing by reversing Step 2.
5. Reinstall the electronics module per Steps 6 through 9 in the previous procedure.
Adding the Optional Display

To add the optional display, refer to Figure 40 and proceed as follows:
2. Remove the electronics compartment cover by rotating it counterclockwise. Screw in cover
lock if applicable.
3. Plug the display into the receptacle at the top of the electronics assembly.
4. Ensure that the O-ring is seated in its groove in the display housing. Then insert the
display into the electronics compartment by grasping the two tabs on the display and
rotating it about 10° in a clockwise direction.
5. Install the new cover (with a window) onto the housing by rotating it clockwise to seat the
O-ring into the housing and then continue to hand tighten until the cover contacts the
housing metal-to-metal. If cover locks are present, lock the cover per the procedure
described in “Cover Locks” on page 24.
Replacing the Sensor Assembly

To replace the sensor assembly, refer to Figures 41 and 42 and proceed as follows:
1. Remove the electronics module as described above.
2. Remove the housing as described above.
3. Remove the process covers from sensor by removing two hex head bolts.
4. Replace the gaskets in the process covers.
5. Install the process covers and housing on the new sensor. Torque cover bolts to 100 N⋅m
(75 lb⋅ft) in several even increments. Torque values are 68 N⋅m (50 lb⋅ft) when 316 ss bolts
are specified; 75 N⋅m (55 lb⋅ft) when B7M bolts are specified.
6. Reinstall electronics module.
7. Pressure test the sensor and process cover assembly by applying a hydrostatic pressure
of 150% of the maximum static and overrange pressure rating to both sides of the process
cover/sensor assembly simultaneously through the process connections. Hold pressure
for one minute. There should be no leakage of the test fluid through the gaskets. If leakage
occurs, retighten the cover bolts per Step 5 (or replace the gaskets) and retest.
! CAUTION
Perform hydrostatic test with a liquid and follow proper hydrostatic test procedures.
59
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 6. Maintenance
PROCESS COVER
SENSOR
PROCESS COVER
GASKETS
HEX HEAD BOLTS
Figure 41. Replacing the Sensor Assembly
BOTTOMWORKS WITH
PROCESS CONNECTOR
CODE 7
pvdf INSERTS
PROCESS CONNECTIONS
Figure 42. Replacing the Sensor Assembly (pvdf Inserts)
Rotating Process Covers for Venting

As received, your IASPT Transmitter provides sensor cavity draining without the need for side drain
connections, regardless of whether the transmitter is mounted vertically or horizontally. Sensor cavity
venting is provided by mounting the transmitter horizontally or with the optional vent screw (-V). How-
60
6. Maintenance MI IDP10-T – July 2008
ever, if you did not specify this option, you can still achieve venting (instead of draining) with vertical
mounting by rotating the process covers. See Figure 43.
LIQUID PROCESS FLOW
STANDARD
ORIENTATION
PROCESS COVERS
CONDENSED
LIQUID FREELY
DRAINS
GASEOUS PROCESS FLOW

GAS FREELY VENTS INVERTED
PROCESS
COVERS
Figure 43. Sensor Cavity Venting and Draining
To rotate the process covers, refer to Figure 41 and proceed as follows:

1. Turn off the transmitter power source and remove the transmitter from the process.
2. Remove the process covers from sensor by removing two hex head bolts.
3. Replace gaskets in process covers.
4. Rotate the process covers so that the longer tab is at the bottom.
5. Reinstall process covers and bolts. Torque cover bolts to 100 N⋅m (75 lb⋅ft) in several even
increments. Torque values are 68 N⋅m (50 lb⋅ft) when 316 ss bolts are specified; 75 N⋅m
(55 lb⋅ft) when B7M bolts are specified.
6. Pressure test the sensor and process cover assembly by applying a hydrostatic pressure
of 150% of the maximum static and overrange pressure (see “Standard Specifications” on
page 5) to both sides of the process cover/sensor assembly simultaneously through the
process connections. Hold pressure for one minute. There should be no leakage of the
test fluid through the gaskets. If leakage occurs, retighten the cover bolts per Step 4 or
replace the gaskets and retest.
! CAUTION
Perform hydrostatic test with a liquid and follow proper hydrostatic test procedures.
61
Index
C
Calibration 35
Using a HART Communicator 39
Using a PC20 39
Using a PC50 Configurator 39
Using the Local Display 39
Calibration Notes 35
Calibration Setup 37
Configuration 45
Using a HART Communicator 46
Using the Local Display 46
Cover Locks 24
D
Display, Positioning the 24
E
Error Messages
Calibration 44
Configuration 55
Operation 34
H
Housing, Positioning the 24
I
Identification 3
Installation 13
M
Maintenance 57
Mounting 13
O
Operation Via Local Display 31
P
Parts Replacement 57
Piping, Installation of Flow Measurement 21
R
Reference Documents 1
Reranging 32
S
Seal Liquid, Filling the System with 23
Specifications
63
MI IDP10-T – July 2008 Index
Product Safety 10
Standard 5
W
Wiring 25
Write Protect Jumper, Setting the 24
Z
Zero Adjustment Using External Zero Button 42
ISSUE DATES
DEC 2001
OCT 2003
APR 2004
FEB 2005
JUN 2005
FEB 2006
AUG 2006
OCT 2007
JUL 2008
Vertical lines to right of text or illustrations indicate areas changed at last issue date.
33 Commercial Street Invensys, Foxboro, and I/A Series are trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries, and affiliates.
Foxboro, MA 02035-2099 All other brand names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
United States of America
http://www.foxboro.com
Inside U.S.: 1-866-746-6477 Copyright 2001-2008 Invensys Systems, Inc.
Outside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 or All rights reserved
contact your local Foxboro
Representative.
Facsimile: (508) 549-4999 Printed in U.S.A. 0708
FIELD DEVICES - PRESSURE o
Product Specifications Log
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Models IAP10, IGP10, IAP20, and IGP20
I/A Series® Electronic Absolute and Gauge Pressure Transmitters
with HART Communication Protocol
IGP10-T22D1F-L1
IAP10/IGP10
TRANSMITTER
IAP10/IGP10 STRUCTURE CODES
TRANSMITTER 20-23, 30, 31,
IAP20/IGP20
STRUCTURE CODES D1, D2, S3, S4,
TRANSMITTER
52, 53, 60-63, SC, AND SD
D5, D6, S5, S6,
SH, AND SJ
The Foxboro® brand Models IAP10, IGP10, IAP20, and IGP20 are available from Invensys Process Systems
(IPS). These Intelligent, two-wire transmitters provide precise, reliable, measurement of absolute or gauge
pressure, and transmit a 4 to 20 mA output signal with a superimposed HART digital signal for remote
configuration and monitoring.
HIGH DEPENDABILITY
Silicon strain gauge sensors successfully field- Can be provided with numerous configurations of
proven in many thousands of installations. direct connect or remote mount seals.
Simple, elegant sensor packaging with very few The IAP10 and IGP10 are offered with integral
parts; achieves exceptionally high reliability. process connections for sanitary, and pulp and
Aluminum housing has durable, corrosion- paper installations. Also, the IGP10 is offered for
resistant epoxy finish; 316 ss housing also high gauge pressure applications to 52, 105, or
available; both meet NEMA 4X and IEC IP66. 210 MPa (7500, 15 000, or 30 000 psi).
Remote configuration or locally via the optional Sensor wetted parts materials include Co-Ni-Cr,
LCD Indicator. 316L ss, and Hastelloy; additionally, Monel,
tantalum, and gold-plated 316L ss sensors
HART protocol allows multidrop topology.
offered for the IAP20/IGP20.
SIL2-Certified transmitter offered as an option.
Foxboro
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 2
Complies with NAMUR NE 21 interference HART COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

immunity requirement, and NAMUR 105 VERSION -T ELECTRONICS
overrange and underrange annunciations. 4 to 20 mA with HART communications. Allows
CE marked; complies with applicable EMC, direct analog connection to common receivers while
ATEX, and PED European Union Directives. still providing full Intelligent Digital Communications
using a Communicator or PC-based Configurator.
Complies with electromagnetic compatibility
HART Communicators can be upgraded with
requirements of European EMC Directive
89/336/EEC by conforming to following software to accommodate these transmitters. Also,
CENELEC and IEC Standards: EN 50081-2, IPS will make use of the HART Foundation library of
registered DDs (Device Descriptors), and reload a
EN 50082-2, EN 61326, and IEC 61000-4-2
through 61000-4-6. Communicator if the user desires to keep another
supplier's DD along with the Foxboro DD.
Meet numerous requirements for hazardous
In addition to HART, IPS also offers transmitters with
locations. Versions available to meet Agency
other protocols as described below.
flameproof and zone requirements.
FoxCom Version, Software Configurable for Digital or
Numerous mounting bracket set options. Many
4 to 20 mA Output (-D Electronics):
other options and accessories offered.
Provides measurement integration with an I/A Series
Standard 5-year warranty. system, or allows direct analog connection to
common receivers while still providing full intelligent
®
I/A Series PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FAMILY digital communication with a PC-based configurator.
The I/A Series Electronic Pressure Transmitters are a FOUNDATION Fieldbus Version (-F Electronics):
complete family of d/p Cell®, gauge, absolute, This is a FISCO/FNICO compliant all digital, serial,
multirange, multivariable, and premium performance two-way communication system which interconnects
transmitters, as well as transmitters with remote or field devices such as transmitters, actuators, and
direct connect pressure seals, all using field-proven controllers. It is a local area network (LAN) with built-
silicon strain gauge sensors and common topworks. in capability to distribute control across the network.
MODULAR ELECTRONICS Analog Output Version (-A Electronics):

Provides a 4 to 20 mA analog output and includes a
A common HART electronics module is used for all
standard LCD Indicator to provide transmitter
I/A Series HART Pressure Transmitters. Also,
configuration directly from on-board pushbuttons.
because all configuration and calibration data is
stored in the sensor, you can replace a HART module Analog Output Version (-V Electronics):
with another HART module without transmitter A low power, low voltage transmitter that draws no
reconfiguration or recalibration. more than 3 mA, and transmits a 1 to 5 V dc output
Furthermore, if your needs change, the transmitter signal. As with the -A version, it includes a standard
modular design allows easy migration to other LCD Indicator. Refer to PSS 2A-1C13 D.
standards, including FoxCom™, FOUNDATION
Fieldbus, and Analog 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V dc.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 3
HART INTELLIGENT MODULE CONFIGURED commands. The solution permits interface of device
FOR 4 TO 20 mA OUTPUT diagnostics with asset management systems without
Measurements and diagnostics are available from the compromising functional safety. Select Option -S2 for
HART Communicator connected to the two-wire a SIL2-certified HART Transmitter. A copy of the
loop carrying the 4 to 20 mA measurement signal by certification is available via Auxiliary Specification (AS)
using a bidirectional digital signal superimposed on Code CERT-S.
the 4 to 20 mA current signal.
Multiple measurements are transmitted digitally,
MULTIDROP COMMUNICATIONS
including not only the primary measurement in Point-to-point or multidrop topologies are permitted.
pressure units, but also the electronics temperature Multidropping is the connection of several
and sensor temperature which can be used to transmitters to a single communications line.
monitor external heat tracing equipment. Complete Communications between the host computer and
transmitter diagnostics are also communicated. transmitters takes place digitally with the analog
output of the transmitter fixed. Up to fifteen
Configuration and reranging can be accomplished
transmitters can be connected on a single twisted
with the Communicator, PC-based Configurator, or
pair of wires or over leased telephone lines. See
the optional LCD Indicator with pushbuttons.
Figures 8 and 9.
HIGH PERFORMANCE
CHOOSE MOUNTING CONFIGURATION
Both direct-connected and bracket-mounted NEEDED
transmitters utilize microprocessor-based correction
to achieve both excellent accuracy and ambient Direct Connected Transmitters (Models IAP10
temperature compensation. and Models IGP10)
These transmitters are light weight and easy-to-
OPTIONAL SIL2 TRANSMITTERS install. They use 316L ss or Hastelloy C process
Modern industrial processes tend to be technically connections, and a choice of either 316L ss, Cobalt-
complex and have the potential to inflict serious harm Nickel-Chrome, or Hastelloy C for the sensing
to persons or property during a mishap. The IEC diaphragm. See Direct-Connected Transmitters
61508 standard defines safety as “freedom from section.
unacceptable risk.” SIL2 pressure transmitters with
HART communication protocol, in conjunction with Bracket-Mounted Transmitters (Models IAP20
Triconex Safety Systems, provide integrated solutions and Models IGP20)
for safety and critical control applications. The These transmitters offer a large selection of corrosion
integrated solution is certified as interference-free resistant process covers and sensing diaphragm
from the 4 to 20 mA loop; this guarantees the materials. They are suitable for applications requiring
integrity of the safety system and the safety of the low spans, vacuum service, and high overrange
controlled process. The integrated design allows pressure. See Bracket-Mounted Transmitters section.
uninterrupted operation of the safety function, while
allowing access to device level information via HART
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 4
EASE OF INSTALLATION OPTIONAL LCD DIGITAL INDICATOR

Rotatable Topworks allows transmitter installation in This is a two-line digital indicator with on-board
tight places, allows indicator to be positioned in pushbuttons that displays the measurement with a
preferred direction, and eases field retrofit. choice of units. The pushbuttons allow zero and
Two Conduit Entrances offer a choice of entry span adjustments, as well as local configuration
positions for ease of installation and self-draining of without the need for a Communicator or PC-based
condensation regardless of mounting position and Configurator. See Figure 10.
topworks rotation.
Wiring Guides and Terminations provide ease of wire
entry and support, plenty of space to work and store
excess wire, and large, rugged screw terminals for
easy wire termination.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 5
DI RE CT CO N N E CT E D T R A NS M I T T ER S — I AP 10 A N D I G P1 0 ( F I G U R E 1)
EXCEPTIONAL VALUE FLAMEPROOF DESIGN

The combination of small size, light weight, direct The IAP10 and IGP10 flameproof versions are
mounting, standard materials, and wide designed to meet Agency flameproof and zone
measurement capability with high performance make requirements.
this an exceptionally cost effective solution for
process pressure measurement.
DIRECT PROCESS MOUNTING

Because of their light weight and external threaded
connection, these transmitters can be installed
directly on process piping without mounting
brackets. However, for unique requirements, an
optional bracket is offered and connection can be
made to the standard 1/4 NPT internal thread.
WIDE RANGEABILITY
Figure 1. Direct Connected Transmitter
Three absolute pressure versions are offered to allow
(Flameproof Version Shown on Left)
spans from 7 to 21 000 kPa (1 to 3000 psi), and four
gauge pressure versions are offered to allow spans HIGH GAUGE PRESSURE VERSIONS
from 7 to 42 000 kPa (1 to 6000 psi). Refer to IGP20 Three high gauge pressure versions with URLs of 52,
Transmitter for gauge pressure vacuum service. 105, and 210 MPa (7500, 15 000, and 30 000 psi)
are available in the IGP10 line. See PSS 2A-1C13 F.
316L ss, HASTELLOY C, AND Co-Ni-Cr
PROCESS WETTED PARTS
SANITARY AND PULP AND PAPER VERSIONS
With process connection of 316L ss or Hastelloy C,
These transmitters are also available with integral
and sensor diaphragm available in either 316L ss,
process connections for use in sanitary, and pulp and
Hastelloy C, or highly corrosion resistant Co-Ni-Cr,
paper installations. See PSS 2A-1C13 K and
this transmitter is an excellent choice for the vast
PSS 2A-1C13 L, respectively.
majority of process pressure measurements.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 6
B R A C K E T- M O U N T E D T R A N S M I T T E R — I A P 2 0 A N D I G P 2 0 ( F I G U R E 2 )
SENSOR CORROSION PROTECTION

Choice of 316L ss, Co-Ni-Cr, Hastelloy C, Monel,
Gold-Plated 316L ss, and Tantalum materials. High
corrosion resistance of Co-Ni-Cr (TI 037-078) means
long service life in many difficult applications without
the extra cost for exotic materials. Also see TI 37- REMOVABLE
75b for process applicability with Co-Ni-Cr and other GASKETED
PROCESS
process wetted parts materials. CONNECTOR
WIDE RANGEABILITY
Gauge pressure measurement spans may be as low
as 0.12 kPa (0.5 inH2O) to as high as 35 MPa
(5000 psi) by choosing one of only six sensors, and
absolute pressure measurement spans may be as
low as 0.87 kPa (3.5 inH2O) to as high as 21 MPa Figure 2. Bracket-Mounted Transmitter Shown with
Conventional Process Connector
(3000 psi) by choosing one of only four sensors. This
provides exceptional measurement range capability
with a minimum of versions. SENSOR ASSEMBLY
VITON O-RING
VACUUM SERVICE
PROCESS
A lower range limit of -100 kPa (-14.7 psi, -1 bar or INLET
kg/cm2) means that vacuum measurements are
easily handled with the versatile IGP20 Gauge
Pressure transmitter. 1/2 NPT pvdf INSERT USED
AS PROCESS CONNECTION
PROCESS CONNECTOR HI-SIDE COVER NORMALLY ACCEPTS CONVENTIONAL

PROCESS CONNECTOR
Removable, gasketed process connector (Figure 2)
allows a wide range of selections, including 1/4 NPT, Figure 3. Bracket-Mounted Transmitter Shown with 1/2 NPT
1/2 NPT, Rc 1/4, Rc 1/2, and weld neck pvdf Insert Installed in HI-Side Cover
connections.
EASE OF MOUNTING TWO-VALVE MANIFOLD
For highly corrosive chemical processes, a 1/2 NPT
Optional two-valve manifold to isolate transmitter,
pvdf (Kynar) insert, as shown in Figure 3, is installed
and vent pressure, is easily mounted directly to
in the HI-side 316 ss cover and is used as the
transmitter.
process connector. In these applications, tantalum is
used as the sensor diaphragm material.
FLAMEPROOF DESIGN
The transmitters are designed to meet Agency
flameproof and zone requirements.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 7
PRESSURE SEALS
Pressure seals are used with the IAP10, IGP10, Tables 1 and 2 list the various seals that can be used
IAP20, and IGP20 Series Transmitters when it is with these transmitters. To order a transmitter with
necessary to keep the transmitter isolated from the seals, both a Transmitter Model Number and Seal
process. A sealed system is used for a process fluid Model Number are required. See PSS 2A-1Z11 A for
that may be corrosive, viscous, subject to a complete listing of pressure seal models and
temperature extremes, toxic, sanitary, or tend to specifications. Also see Figure 4 for typical pressure
collect and solidify. seal configurations.
Table 1. Pressure Seals Used with IAP10, IGP10, IAP20, and IGP20 Transmitters
Direct Connect Pressure Seal Assemblies
Seal Model Seal Description Process Connections

PSFLT Flanged, Direct Connect (Flanged Level), Flush or ANSI Class 150/300/600 flanges and
Extended Diaphragm BS/DIN PN 10/40, 10/16, 25/40 flanges
PSFAD Flanged, Direct Connect, Recessed Diaphragm ANSI CLass 150, 300, 600, 1500 flanges
PSTAD Threaded, Direct Connect, Recessed Diaphragm 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1, or 1 1/2 NPT internal thread
PSISD In-Line Saddle Weld, Direct Connect, Recessed Lower housing of seal is in-line saddle welded to
Diaphragm nominal 3- or 4-inch (and larger) Pipe
PSSCT Sanitary, Direct Connect (Level Seal), Flush Diaphragm Process Connection to Sanitary Piping with 2- or 3-
inch Tri-Clamp
PSSST Sanitary, Direct Connect (Level Seal), Extended Process Connection to 2-in Mini Spud or 4-in
Diaphragm Standard Spud; Tri-Clamp
Remote Mount, Capillary-Connected Pressure Seal Assemblies
Seal Model Seal Description Process Connections

PSFPS Flanged, Remote Mount, Flush Diaphragm ANSI Class 150/300/600 flanges and
BS/DIN PN 10/40 flanges
PSFES Flanged, Remote Mount, Extended Diaphragm ANSI Class 150/300/600 flanges and
BS/DIN PN 10/40, 10/16, 25/40 flanges
PSFAR Flanged, Remote Mount, Recessed Diaphragm ANSI Class 150/300/600/1500 flanges
PSTAR Threaded, Remote Mount, Recessed Diaphragm 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1, or 1 1/2 NPT internal thread
PSISR In-Line Saddle Weld, Remote Mount, Recessed Lower housing of seal is in-line saddle welded to
Diaphragm nominal 3- or 4-inch (and larger) Pipe
PSSCR Sanitary, Remote Mount, Flush Diaphragm Process Connection secured with a Tri-Clamp to a
2- or 3-inch pipe
PSSSR Sanitary, Remote Mount, Extended Diaphragm Process Connection to 2-in Mini Spud or
4-in Standard Spud; Tri-Clamp
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 8
PRESSURE SEALS (CONT.)
Table 2. I/A Series Pressure Transmitters and Applicable Pressure Seals
Used with Pressure Seal Model: (a)

Transmitter
Model FLT FAD TAD ISD SCT SST FPS FES FAR TAR ISR SCR SSR
IAP10 – – –
IGP10 – – –
IAP20 – – – – – –
IGP20 – – –
(a) Pressure Seal models are shown with an abbreviated code; all seal codes have a PS prefix; for example, FLT is really PSFLT.
Figure 4. Typical Pressure Seals used with IAP10, IGP10, IAP20, and IGP20 Transmitters
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 9
F U N C T I O N A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Span and Range Limits for IAP10 and IGP10 Transmitters

Span Limits Range Limits (Absolute or Gauge Units)
Span
Code MPa psi bar or kg/cm2 MPa psi bar or kg/cm2
C 0.007 and 0.21 1 and 30 0.07 and 2.1 0 and 0.21 0 and 30 0 and 2.1
D 0.07 and 2.1 10 and 300 0.7 and 21 0 and 2.1 0 and 300 0 and 21
E 0.7 and 21 100 and 3000 7 and 210 0 and 21 0 and 3000 0 and 210
F (a) 14 and 42 2000 and 6000 140 and 420 0 and 42 0 and 6000 0 and 420
(a) Span Limit Code F is applicable to IGP10 Transmitter only.
Maximum Overrange and Proof Pressure Ratings for IAP10 and IGP10 Transmitters
Maximum Overrange Pressure Rating (a) Proof Pressure Rating (a)(b)
Span
Code MPa psi bar or kg/cm2 MPa psi bar or kg/cm2
C 0.31 45 3.15 0.827 120 8.27
D 3.1 450 31.5 8.27 1200 82.7
E 31 4500 315 79.3 11500 793
F (c) 59 8400 588 152 22000 1517
(a) Values listed are in absolute or gauge pressure units, as applicable. Maximum overrange pressure is the maximum pressure that may
be applied without causing damage to the transmitter.
(b) Proof pressure ratings meet ANSI/ISA Standard S82.03-1988. Unit may become nonfunctional after application of proof pressure.
(c) Span Limit Code F is applicable to IGP10 Transmitter only.
Span and Range Limits for IAP20 and IGP20 Transmitters

Span Limits Range Limits (Absolute or Gauge Units) (a)
Span
Code kPa inH2O mbar kPa inH2O mbar
A (b) 0.12 and 7.5 0.5 and 30 1.2 and 75 -7.5 and +7.5 -30 and +30 -75 and +75
B 0.87(c) and 50 3.5(c) and 200 8.7(c) and 500 -50(a) and +50 -200(a) and +200 -500(a) and +500
bar or
MPa psi kg/cm2 MPa psi bar or kg/cm2
0.007 and -0.1(a) and
C 0.21 1 and 30 0.07 and 2.1 0.21 -14.7(a) and +30 -1(a) and +2.1
D 0.07 and 2.1 10 and 300 0.7 and 21 -0.1(a) and 2.1 -14.7(a) and +300 -1(a) and +21
E (d) 0.7 and 21 100 and 3000 7 and 210 -0.1(a) and 21 -14.7(a) and +3000 -1(a) and +210
F (b) 1.38 and 35 200 and 5000 13.8 and 350 -0.1 and +35 -14.7 and +5000 -1 and +350
(a) For absolute pressure transmitters (IAP20), the lower range limit is 0.
(b) Span Codes A and F applicable to IGP20 Transmitter only. Also, Span Code A is not available when pressure seals are specified.
(c) For the IAP20, the minimum span for factory calibration is 1.2 kPa (5 inH2O, 12.4 mbar). This span can be field reranged within the
limits shown in table.
(d) When certain options are specified, the upper span and range limit values are reduced as shown in the “Options Impact” table.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 10
F U N C T I O N A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S ( C O N T . )
Maximum Overrange and Proof Pressure Ratings for IAP 20 and IGP20 Transmitters (a)
Overrange Pressure Rating Proof Pressure Rating (b)
Transmitter Configuration bar or bar or

(See Model Code for Description of Options) MPa psi kg/cm2 MPa psi kg/cm2
Standard with IGP20 Span Code F only 51.8 7500 518 100 14500 1000
Standard (c) or with Option -B2, -D3, or -D7 25 3625 250 100 14500 1000
With Option -B3 20 2900 200 70 11150 700
With Option -D1 16 2320 160 64 9280 640
With Option -B1 or -D5 15 2175 150 60 8700 600
With Option -D2, -D4, -D6, or -D8 10 1500 100 40 6000 400
With Structure Codes 78 and 79 (pvdf insert) 2.1 300 21 8.4 1200 84
(a) Refer to Model Code section for application and restrictions related to the items listed in the table.
(b) Proof pressure ratings meet ANSI/ISA Standard S82.03-1988. Unit may become nonfunctional after application of proof pressure.
(c) Standard with IAP20/IGP20 Span Codes A to E.
Impact of Certain Options on IAP20/IGP20 Span and Range Limits (a)

Option Description (Also see Model Code) Span and Range Limits Derated to:
-B3 B7M Bolts and Nuts (NACE) 20 MPa (2900 psi, 200 bar, or kg/cm2)
-D1 DIN Construction 16 MPa (2320 psi, 160 bar or kg/cm2)
-D5 or -B1 DIN Construction or 316 ss Bolting 15 MPa (2175 psi, 150 bar or kg/cm2)
-D2, -D4, -D6, or -D8 (a) DIN Construction (a) 10 MPa (1500 psi, 100 bar or kg/cm2) (a)
(a) Refer to Model Code section for application and restrictions related to the items listed in the table.
Output Signal and Configuration Field Wiring Reversal

Output is 4 to 20 mA with digital HART No transmitter damage.
communications. For multidrop applications, the mA Suppressed Zero and Elevated Zero
signal is fixed at 4 mA to provide power to the
Suppressed or elevated zero ranges are acceptable
device. Configurable using the HART Communicator,
as long as the Span and Range Limits are not
PC-based Configurator, or optional LCD Indicator
exceeded (elevated zero applicable to IGP20 only).
with on-board pushbuttons.
Zero and Span Adjustments
Electronics and Sensor Temperatures
Zero and span adjustments can be initiated using the
Readable from the Communicator or PC-based
Communicator, a PC-based Configurator, or the
Configurator. Measurement is transmitter
optional LCD with on-board pushbuttons.
temperature, at the sensor and the electronic
module, not necessarily process temperature.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 11
Write Protect Jumper Zeroing for Nonzero-Based Ranges
Can be positioned to lock out all configurators from Dual Function Zeroing allows zeroing with the
making transmitter database changes. This makes transmitter open to atmosphere, even when there is
transmitter suitable for Safety Shutdown System a nonzero-based range. This greatly simplifies
Applications that require this feature. position effect zeroing on many pressure and level
Supply Voltage Requirements and External applications. It applies to the LCD Indicator
Loop Load Limitations (Figure 5) pushbuttons and optional External Zero Adjustment.
Nominal minimum supply voltage is 11.5 V dc. This Adjustable Damping

value can be reduced to 11 V dc by using a plug-in The transmitter response time is normally 0.75 s, or
jumper across the test receptacles in the field wiring the electronically adjustable setting of 0.00 (none),
compartment terminal block as shown in the Physical 0.25, 0.50, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 seconds, whichever
Specifications section. is greater, for a 90% recovery from an 80% input step
as defined in ANSI/ISA S51.1. (For 63.2% recovery,
1500
0.50 s with sensors B to F, and 0.60 s with sensor A.)
TYPICAL SUPPLY 1450
VOLTAGE AND Minimum Allowable Absolute Pressure vs.
LOAD LIMITS
V dc LOAD Ω Transmitter Temperature
24 250 & 594 WITH SILICONE FILL FLUID
OUTPUT LOAD, Ω
1000 30 250 & 880

32 250 & 975 Full Vacuum: up to 121°C (250°F)
MIN. LOAD WITH WITH INERT FILL FLUID
COMMUNICATOR
OR PC-BASED Refer to Figure 6.
500 CONFIG. OPERATING
AREA
TEMPERATURE, ° C
250 -30 0 30 60 40 120
140
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE, mmHg
SEE NOTE BELOW

0 120
0 10 20 30 40 50 100
11.5 42 FLUORINERT
80
SUPPLY VOLTAGE, V dc FC-43 FLUID
60 OPERATING
NOTE AREA
Transmitter will function with an output load less 40
than 250 Ω provided that a HART Communicator
20
or PC-based Configurator is not connected to it.
Use of a Communicator or PC-based Configurator 0
requires 250 Ω minimum load. -25 0 50 100 150 200 250
TEMPERATURE, ° F
Figure 5. 4 to 20 mA Output,
Supply Voltage vs. Output Load Figure 6. Minimum Allowable
Absolute Pressure vs. Transmitter Temperature,
Inert FC-43, 2.6 cSt at 25°C (77°F)
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 12
Current Outputs for Overrange, Fail, and Offline Diagram). This means that the electronics module
Conditions may be replaced, with one of like type, without the
Parameter Current Outputs need for reconfiguration or recalibration.
Offline Configurable between 4 and 20 mA Although module replacement can affect accuracy by
Sensor Failure Configurable to Fail LO or Fail HI a maximum of 0.20% of span, this error can be
Fail LO 3.60 mA removed by a mA trim without application of
Underrange 3.80 mA pressure. Changing module types (e.g., from one to
Overrange 20.50 mA another communication protocol) may require
Fail HI 21.00 mA reconfiguration and recalibration, as well as a
Configuration and Calibration Data and different terminal block, but all factory
Electronics Upgradeability characterization data is retained.
All factory characterization data and user
configuration and calibration data are stored in the
sensor (refer to Figure 7, Transmitter Functional
Sensor Electronics Module
Analog to Digital Digital

to 4 to 20 mA
Output with
Nonvolatile HART
Microprocessor Communications
Memory -
- Complete - Sensor
Transmitter -
Configuration Linearization
-
Pressure
- Correction -
Coefficients - Reranging
- Calibration -
Data - Loop Calibration
-
Damping HART
Sensor Modem
1200 Baud Remote
Temperature
Communication
Piezo-Resistive Memory HART
Communicator
Measured - Calibration or
Pressure PC-based
Atmospheric - Configurator
Vent (Gauge),
or Sealed
Reference LCD External
(Absolute)
Figure 7. Transmitter Functional Block Diagram

PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 13
Configuration Capability distances up to 1525 m (5000 ft). The
CALIBRATED RANGE communications rate is 1200 baud and requires
– Input range within Range Limits a minimum loop load of 250 ohms.
– See Table 3 for pressure units
OUTPUT MEASUREMENT #1 – Table 3.
DIGITAL PRIMARY VARIABLE AND 4 TO 20 mA Allowable Pressure Units for Calibrated Range (a)
Mode: Linear
Units: See Table 3 for pressure units inH2O psi Pa atm g/cm2
ftH2O inHg kPa bar kg/cm2
OUTPUT MEASUREMENT #2 –
mmH2O mmHg MPa mbar torr
DIGITAL SECONDARY VARIABLE
mH2O – – – –
Mode: Linear
(a) For absolute pressure, change psi to psia and MPa to MPaa, etc.
Units: See Table 3 for pressure units
Communications
250 Ω MINIMUM BETWEEN POWER
Configurable for either Analog or Multidrop (fixed SUPPLY AND COMMUNICATOR
current) Modes. Digital communications is provided +
in both modes based upon the FSK (Frequency Shift INDICATOR
+
Keying) technique which alternately superimposes POWER
+ SUPPLY
one of two different frequencies on the uninterrupted
current carried by the two signal/power wires. See
Figures 8 and 9.
ANALOG MODE (4 to 20 mA) +
The 4 to 20 mA output signal is updated
DIRECT COMMUNICATOR OR PC-
30 times per second. Digital communications CONTROLLER
CONNECTED BASED CONFIGURATOR
OR
between the transmitter and HART TRANSMITTER MAY BE CONNECTED AT
RECORDER
SHOWN ANY POINT IN THE LOOP,
Communicator is rated for distances up to SUBJECT TO THE 250 Ω
REQUIREMENT SHOWN.
3050 m (10 000 ft). The communications rate is
1200 baud and requires a minimum loop load of Figure 8. 4 to 20 mA Output Functional Block Diagram
Point-to-Point Communications
250 ohms.
MULTIDROP MODE (FIXED CURRENT)
HART
This Mode supports communications with up to HOST COMPATIBLE
15 transmitters on a single pair of signal/power COMPUTER MODEM 250
wires. The output signal is updated 4 times per MIN.
second and carries not only the pressure
measurement, but also the sensor and
electronics temperatures (internal recalculation
rate for temperature is once per second). GAUGE
TEMP. d/p Cell POWER
Communication between transmitter and XMTR
PRESS
XMTR
XMTR SUPPLY
system, or between transmitter and
Communicator or Configurator, is rated for Figure 9. Typical Multidrop Functional Block Diagram
(Up to Fifteen Transmitters)
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 14
Remote Communications
The HART Communicator or PC-based Configurator Table 4.
has full access to all of the “Display” and “Display Example of Custom Configuration Option -C2
and Reconfigure” items listed below. It may be Example of
connected to the communications wiring loop, and Standard Custom
(Default) Configuration
does not disturb the mA current signal. Plug-in Parameter Configuration Option -C2
connection points for the communicator are also
Tagging Info.
provided on the transmitter terminal block. Tag TAG PT101
(8 char. max.)
“Display” Items TAG NAME WATER PRESS.
Descriptor
Process Measurement in two formats (16 char. max.)
Message LOCATION BUILDING 2
Electronics and Sensor Temperatures
(32 char. max.)
mA Output 0 0 (a)
HART Poll Address
(0 to 15)
“Display and Reconfigure” Items
Calibrated Range
Two Digital Outputs for Pressure Pressure EGU per S.O. (b) inH2O
Choice of Pressure Engineering Units LRV per S.O. (c) 0
URV per S.O. (c) 100
Reranging without Pressure
Measurement #1
Zero and Span Calibration Pressure EGU per S.O. (d) inH2O
Electronic Damping Output 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA (e)
Temperature Sensor Failure Strategy Measurement #2
Pressure EGU per S.O. (d) inH2O
Failsafe Direction
Other
Tag, Descriptor, and Message
Electronic Damping None 0.5 s
Date of Last Calibration Failsafe Direction Upscale Downscale
Failure Strategy Continue Failsafe
Optional Custom Configuration (Option -C2) Ext. Zero Option Enabled Disabled
For the transmitter to be custom configured by the (a) Address is 1 to 15 for multidrop applications.
factory, the user must fill out a data form. If this (b) Units from Table 3. If not specified, factory default calibration is
option is not selected, a standard (default) zero to maximum span; default units vary by sensor code.
configuration will be provided. Refer to Table 4. (c) Within Span and Range Limits for selected sensor code.
(d) Same as Calibrated Range.
(e) Fixed current is used for multidrop applications.
NOTE
Any of the configurable parameters in
Table 4 can easily be changed using the
HART Communicator or PC-based
Configurator.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 15
Optional LCD Indicator w/Pushbuttons
(Figure 10) TOPWORKS
WITH COVER
Indicator provides: REMOVED
Two Lines: Five numeric characters on top line
(four when a minus sign is needed); and seven
OPTIONAL
alphanumeric characters on bottom line. EXTERNAL OPTIONAL
ZERO LCD
Measurement readout: Value displayed on top PUSHBUTTON
NEXT ENTER
INDICATOR
line, and units label displayed on bottom line.
"NEXT" "ENTER"
Configuration and calibration prompts. PUSHBUTTON PUSHBUTTON
Pushbuttons (two) provide the following configuration Figure 10. LCD Indicator with Pushbuttons
and calibration prompts:
Optional External Zero Adjustment
Zero and Span settings, noninteractive to
An external pushbutton mechanism (Figure 10) is
automatically set output to either 4 mA or 20 mA
isolated from the electronics compartment and
using the “NEXT” and “ENTER” pushbuttons.
magnetically activates an internal reed switch through
4 and 20 mA Jog Settings, allowing the user to the housing. This eliminates a potential leak path for
easily increment the mA output signal up or down moisture or contaminants to get into the electronics
in fine steps to match a value shown on an compartment. This zero adjustment can be disabled
external calibrator. by a configuration adjustment.
Forward or Reverse Output
Damping Adjustment
Enable/Disable Optional External Zero
Temperature Sensor Failure Strategy
Failsafe Action (High or Low)
Units Label (Bottom Line of Display)
Settable Lower and Upper Range Values for

Transmission and Display (Top Line)
Reranging without Pressure
Percent (%) Output

PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 16
O P E R AT I N G, S T O R A G E , A N D T R A N S P O RTAT I ON C O N D I T I O N S
Reference Storage and
Operating Normal Operating Transportation
Influence Conditions Conditions (a) Operative Limits (a) Limits
Process Connection Temp.
with Silicone Fill Fluid 24 ± 2°C -29 to + 82°C -46 and +121°C(b) Not Applicable
(75 ± 3°F) (-20 to +180°F) (-50 and +250°F)(b)
with Fluorinert Fill Fluid 24 ± 2°C -29 to + 82°C -29 and +121°C Not Applicable
(75 ± 3°F) (-20 to +180°F) (-20 and +250°F)
Electronics Temperature 24 ± 2°C -29 to + 82°C(g) -40 and +85°C(g) -54 and +85°C
(75 ± 3°F) (-20 to +180°F)(g) (-40 and +185°F)(g) (-65 and +185°F)
with LCD Indicator (c) 24 ± 2°C -20 to + 82°C(g) -29 and +85°C(g) -54 and +85°C
(75 ± 3°F) (-4 to +180°F)(g) (-20 and +185°F)(g) (-65 and +185°F)
Relative Humidity (d) 50 ± 10% 0 to 100% 0 and 100% 0 and 100%
Noncondensing
Supply Voltage - mA Output 30 ± 0.5 V dc 11.5 to 42 V dc (e) 11.5 and 42 V dc (e) Not Applicable
Output Load - mA Output 650 Ω 0 to 1450 Ω 0 and 1450 Ω Not Applicable
Vibration 1 m/s2 6.3 mm (0.25 in) Double Amplitude: 11 m/s2
(0.1 “g”) from 5 to 15 Hz with Aluminum Housing and from (1.1 “g”)
5 to 9 Hz with 316 ss Housing from 2.5 to 5 Hz
------------------------------- (in Shipping Package)
0 to 30 m/s2 (0 to 3 “g”) from 15 to 500 Hz with
Aluminum Housing; and
0 to 10 m/s2 (0 to 1 “g”) from 9 to 500 Hz
with 316 ss Housing
Mounting Position Upright (f) Upright (f) No Limit Not Applicable
(a) Temperature limits are derated as follows:
IAP20 and IGP20 Transmitters:
to -7 and +82°C (20 and 180°F) when Structure Codes 78/79 (pvdf inserts) are used, and
to 0 and 60°C (32 and 140°F) when DIN Construction Options D2/D4/D6/D8 are used.
(b) Selection of Option -J extends the low temperature limit of transmitters with silicone filled sensors down to -50°C (-58°F).
(c) Although the LCD will not be damaged at any temperature within the “Storage and Transportation Limits”, updates will be slowed and
readability decreased at temperatures outside the “Normal Operating Conditions”.
(d) With topworks covers on and conduit entrances sealed.
(e) 11.5 V dc can be reduced to 11 V dc by using a plug-in shorting bar; see “Physical Specifications” sections.
(f) Sensor process wetted diaphragms in a vertical plane for IAP20 and IGP20 Transmitter.
(g) Refer to the Electrical Safety Specifications section for a restriction in ambient temperature limits with certain electrical
approvals/certifications.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 17
P E R F O R M A N C E S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Zero-Based Calibrations; 316L ss or Co-Ni-Cr Diaphragms with Silicone Fluid for IGP10 and IAP10;
Cobalt-Nickel-Chromium or 316L Stainless Steel Sensor with Silicone Fluid for IGP20;
Under Reference Operating Conditions unless otherwise Specified;
URL = Upper Range Limit, and Span = Calibrated Span.
Accuracy (Includes Linearity, Hysteresis, Position Effect

and Repeatability) The transmitter may be mounted in any position. Any
Accuracy, % of Span (a)(b) zero effect caused by the mounting position can be
Spans ≥10% URL Spans <10% URL eliminated by rezeroing. There is no span effect.
±0.060% ±[0.025 + 0.0035 (URL/Span)]%
Ambient Temperature Effect
(a) Add ±0.04% for Span Code A, and ±0.02% for Span Codes E
and F.
Total effect for a 28°C (50°F) change within Normal
(b) Subtract ±0.01% for digital output accuracy. Operating Condition limits is:
Stability For the IAP10 and IGP10 Transmitters
Long term drift is less than ±0.05% of URL per year Span Code (a) Ambient Temperature Effect
over a 5-year period. C, D, E, and F ± (0.03% URL + 0.060% Span)
Calibration Frequency (a) Span Code F applicable to IGP10 Transmitter only.
The calibration frequency is five years. The five years
is derived using the values of allowable error (%
For the IAP20 and IGP20 Transmitters
span), TPE (% span), performance margin (% span),
and stability (% span/month); where: Span Code Ambient Temperature Effect
Performance Margin A (a) ± (0.18% URL + 0.025% Span)

Calibration Frequency = ------------------------------------------------------ = Months
Stability B and C ± (0.03% URL + 0.060% Span)
D ± (0.05% URL + 0.045% Span)
Power-Up Time
E and F (a) ± (0.08% URL + 0.025% Span)
Less than 5 seconds for output to reach first valid
(a) Span Codes A and F applicable to IGP20 Transmitter only.
measurement.
NOTE
Supply Voltage Effect For additional ambient temperature effect
The output changes less than 0.005% of span for when pressure seals are used, see
each 1 V change within the specified supply voltage PSS 2A-1Z11 A.
requirements. See Figure 5.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 18
P E R F O R M A N C E S P E C I F I C AT I O N S ( C O N T . )
Vibration Effect RFI Effect
Total effect is ±0.2% of URL per “g” for vibrations in The output error is less than 0.1% of span for radio
the frequency range of 5 to 500 Hz; with double frequencies in the range of 27 to 1000 MHz and field
amplitudes of 6.3 mm (0.25 in) in the range of 5 to 15 intensity of 30 V/m when the transmitter is properly
Hz, or accelerations of 3 “g” in the range of 15 to 500 installed with shielded conduit and grounding, and
Hz, whichever is smaller, for transmitters with housing covers are in place. (Per IEC Std. 61000-4-3.)
aluminum housings; and with double amplitudes of Switching and Indirect Lightning Transients
6.3 mm (0.25 in) in the range of 5 to 9 Hz, or
The transmitter can withstand a transient surge up to
accelerations of 1 “g” in the range of 9 to 500 Hz,
2000 V common mode or 1000 V normal mode
whichever is smaller, for transmitters with 316 ss
without permanent damage. The output shift is less
housings.
than 1.0%. (Per ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1980 and
IEC Std. 61000-4-5.)
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 19
P H Y S I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Direct Connected Bracket Mounted

Absolute and Gauge Pressure Absolute and Gauge Pressure
Description Transmitters IAP10 and IGP10 Transmitters IAP20 and IGP20
Process Wetted Parts Mat'ls.
(High Pressure Side)
Process Connection 316L ss or Hastelloy C Carbon Steel, 316 ss, Hastelloy C,
Monel, or pvdf (Kynar)
Gaskets Not Applicable Glass Filled ptfe (Chemloy), Viton
Sensor Diaphragm 316L ss, Co-Ni-Cr, or Hastelloy Co-Ni-Cr, 316L ss, Gold-Plated
C 316L ss, Hastelloy C, Monel, or
Tantalum
Reference Side Mat’ls. IGP10 Transmitter: Sensor Diaphragm:
(Atmospheric Pressure Side) Silicon, Pyrex, RTV, and 316 ss Same as specified for High Pressure side
IAP10 Transmitter: process wetted material.
N/A Cover:
316 ss
Sensor Fill Fluid Silicone or Fluorinert Silicone or Fluorinert
Bolts and Nuts for Process Cover N/A Standard Bolting:
and Connector ASTM A193, Grade B7 Bolts
ASTM A194, Grade 2H Nuts
Optional Bolting:
316 ss, Type 17-4 ss, or B7M (NACE)
Electrical Housing and Housing Two compartments to separate electronics from field connections. Material is low
Covers copper (1% maximum) die-cast aluminum alloy with epoxy finish, or 316 ss.
Environmental Protection Dusttight and weatherproof per IEC IP66 and NEMA 4X.
Electronics Module Printed wiring assemblies are conformally coated for moisture and dust protection.
Electrical Connections 1/2 NPT (Code 1) or PG 13.5 (Code 2) entrances on both sides of electronics housing,
as specified. Unused entrance must be plugged to ensure moisture and RFI protection
(Aluminum or 316 ss plug supplied by Foxboro).
Mounting Position The transmitter may be mounted in any orientation.
Approximate Mass Standard Transmitter With Process Connectors
(Does not include seals. Refer to 1.5 kg (3.3 lb) 4.2 kg (9.2 lb)
PSS 2A-1Z11 A for integral With 316 ss Housing Without Process Connectors
transmitter and seal systems) Add 1.1 kg (2.4 lb) 3.5 kg (7.8 lb)
With LCD Indicator Option With 316 ss Housing
Add 0.2 kg (0.4 lb) Add 1.1 kg (2.4 lb)
With LCD Indicator Option
Add 0.2 kg (0.4 lb)
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 20
P H Y SI C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S ( C O N T . )
Direct Connected Bracket Mounted

Absolute and Gauge Pressure Absolute and Gauge Pressure
Description Transmitters IAP10 and IGP10 Transmitters IAP20 and IGP20
Field Terminal Connections
TERMINAL BLOCK LOCATED
IN FIELD TERMINAL SIDE
EARTH (GROUND) OF TRANSMITTER
TERMINAL SCREW,
0.164-32 COMMUNICATOR OPTIONAL
OR PC-BASED SHORTING BAR
+ (SB-11) REDUCES
(+) AND (-) CONFIGURATOR
PLUGS INSERTED MINIMUM VOLTAGE
POWER HHT
HERE FROM 11.5 V dc
TERMINAL
TO 11 V dc
SCREWS, USED TO CHECK
0.164-32 CAL+
TRANSMITTER
4 TO 20 mA OUTPUT
RECEPTACLES (3) -
FOR STANDARD
BANANA PLUGS
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 21
E L EC T R I CA L SAF ET Y S PE CI F I CAT I ON S
IAP10 and IGP10 Transmitters

Electrical
Testing Laboratory, Types of Safety
Protection, and Area Classification Application Conditions Design Code
ATEX flameproof; II 2 GD EEx d IIC, Zone 1. Temperature Class T6, T85°C, D
Ta = -40°C to +80°C.
ATEX intrinsically safe; II 1 GD EEx ia IIC, Zone 0. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40°C to +80°C. E
ATEX protection n; II 3 GD, EEx nL IIC, Zone 2. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40°C to +80°C. N
ATEX multiple certifications, ia and ib, and n. Refer to Applies to Codes E and N but not to Code D. M
ATEX Codes E and N for details.
ATEX multiple certifications, ia and ib, d, and n. Refer Applies to Codes D, E, and N. P
to ATEX Codes D, E, and N for details.
CSA intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, Temperature Class T4A at 40°C and T3C at 85°C C
B, C, and D, Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; maximum ambient.
Also, zone certified intrinsically safe Ex ia IIC, and Temperature Class T4 at 40°C and T3 at 85°C
energy limited Ex nA II. maximum ambient.
CSA explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, Maximum Ambient Temperature 85°C. C
C, and D, and dust-ignitionproof for Class II,
Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; and Class III,
Division 1.
CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D; Temperature Class T4A at 40°C and T3C at 85°C C
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; and Class III, maximum ambient.
Division 2.
CSA field device zone certified flameproof Ex d IIC. Maximum Ambient Temperature 85°C. B
Also, all certifications of Code C above.
FM intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, Temperature Class T4A at 40°C and T4 at 85°C F
B, C, and D, Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; maximum ambient.
Also, zone certified intrinsically safe AEx ia IIC. Temperature Class T4 at 85°C maximum
ambient.
FM explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, Temperature Class T6 at 80°C and T5 at 85°C F
C, and D; and dust-ignitionproof for Class II, maximum ambient.
Division 1.
FM nonincendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, Temperature Class T4A at 40°C and T4 at 85°C F
and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G, and maximum ambient.
FM field device zone certified flameproof AEx d IIC. Temperature Class T6 at 75°C maximum G
Also, all certifications of Code F above. ambient.
This table continued on next page.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 22
E L EC T R I CA L SA F ET Y S PE CI F I CAT I O N S ( CO N T . )
IAP10 and IGP10 Transmitters (Cont.)

Electrical
IECEx intrinsically safe, Ex ia IIC. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40°C to +80°C. T
IECEx protection n, Ex nL IIC. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40°C to +80°C. U
IECEx flameproof, Ex d IIC. Temperature Class T6, Ta = -40°C to +75°C. V
NOTE
1. Transmitter has been designed to meet the electrical safety descriptions listed. Contact IPS for
information or status of testing laboratory approvals or certifications.
2. See Model Code for availability of Electrical Safety Design Codes with particular Transmitter
structures.
3. Refer to applicable Instruction Manual for application conditions and connectivity requirements.
4. When selecting ATEX Safety Design Code M or P, the user must permanently mark (check off in
rectangle block on data plate) one type of protection only (ia and ib, d, or n). Do not change this
mark.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 23
E L E C T R I C A L S A F E T Y S PE CI F I C AT I O N S ( C O N T . )

Electrical
ATEX flameproof; II 2 GD EEx d IIC, Zone 1. Temperature Class T6, T85°C, D
Ta = -40°C to +80°C.
ATEX intrinsically safe; II 1 GD EEx ia IIC, Zone 0. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40°C to +80°C. E
ATEX protection n; II 3 GD, EEx nL IIC, Zone 2. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40°C to +80°C. N
ATEX multiple certifications, ia and ib, and n. Refer to Applies to Codes D, E, and N. M
ATEX Codes E and N for details.
CSA intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, Temperature Class T4A at 40°C and T3C at C
B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; 85°C maximum ambient.
Also, zone certified intrinsically safe Ex ia IIC, and Temperature Class T4 at 40°C and T3 at 85°C
energy limited Ex nA II. maximum ambient.
CSA explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, Maximum Ambient Temperature 85°C. C
C, and D, and dust-ignitionproof for Class II,
Division 1.
CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D; Temperature Class T4A at 40°C and T3C at C
Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; and Class III, 85°C maximum ambient.
Division 2.
CSA field device zone certified flameproof Ex d IIC. Maximum Ambient Temperature 85°C. B
Also, all certifications of Code C above.
FM intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, Temperature Class T4A at 40°C and T4 at 85°C F
B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; maximum ambient.
Also, zone certified intrinsically safe AEx ia IIC. Temperature Class T4 at 85°C maximum
ambient.
FM explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, Temperature Class T6 at 80°C and T5 at 85°C F
C, and D; and dust-ignitionproof for Class II, maximum ambient.
Division 1, Groups E, F, and G, and Class III,
Division 1.
FM nonincendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, Temperature Class T4A at 40°C and T4 at 85°C F
and D; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G; and maximum ambient.
FM field device zone certified flameproof AEx d IIC. Temperature Class T6 at 75°C maximum G
Also, all certifications of Code F above. ambient.
This table continued on next page.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 24
E L EC T R I CA L SA F ET Y S PE CI F I CAT I O N S ( CO N T . )
IAP20 and IGP20 Transmitters (Cont)

Electrical
IECEx intrinsically safe, Ex ia IIC. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40°C to +80°C. T
IECEx protection n, Ex nL IIC. Temperature Class T4, Ta = -40°C to +80°C. U
IECEx flameproof, Ex d IIC. Applies to Version 5 electronic module. V
T6, Ta = 80°C; T5, Ta = 85°C
Ambient Temperature -20°C to +85°C.
NOTE
1. Transmitter has been designed to meet the electrical safety descriptions listed. Contact IPS for
information or status of testing laboratory approvals or certifications.
2. See Model Code for availability of Electrical Safety Design Codes with particular Transmitter
structures.
3. Refer to applicable Instruction Manual for application conditions and connectivity requirements.
4. When selecting ATEX Safety Design Code M or P, the user must permanently mark (check off in
rectangle block on data plate) one type of protection only (ia and ib, d, or n). Do not change this
mark.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 25
M O DE L C O D E S
IGP10-T22D1F-L1
Description Model
I/A Series, Electronic, Direct Connected Absolute Pressure Transmitter IAP10 (a)
I/A Series, Electronic, Direct Connected Gauge Pressure Transmitter IGP10 (a)
Electronics Versions and Output Signal
Intelligent; Digital HART and 4 to 20 mA dc (Version -T) -T
Structure Code - Select from one of the following six groups:
1. Transmitter Only (no seals)
Process Sensor
Connection Sensor Fill Fluid Connection Type
316L ss Co-Ni-Cr Silicone 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 20
316L ss Co-Ni-Cr Inert 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 21
316L ss 316L ss Silicone 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 22
316L ss 316L ss Inert 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 23
316L ss Hastelloy C Silicone 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 30
316L ss Hastelloy C Inert 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 31
2. Transmitter Prepared for Foxboro Model Coded Seals (b)
Transmitter Prepared for Foxboro Direct Connect Seal; Silicone Fill in Sensor (c) D1
Transmitter Prepared for Foxboro Direct Connect Seal; Inert Fill in Sensor (IGP10 only) (c) D2
Transmitter Prepared for Foxboro Remote Mount Seal; Silicone Fill in Sensor (d) S3
Transmitter Prepared for Foxboro Remote Mount Seal; Inert Fill in Sensor (IGP10 only) (d) S4
3. Transmitters Prepared for non-Foxboro Seals
Transmitter Prepared for Remote Seal; Silicone Fill in Sensor (e) SC
Transmitter Prepared for Remote Seal; Inert Fill in Sensor (f) SD
4. Flameproof Transmitter Only (no seals)
Process Sensor
Connection Sensor Fill Fluid Connection Type
316L ss 316L ss Silicone 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 52
316L ss 316L ss Inert 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 53
316L ss Hastelloy C Silicone 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 60
316L ss Hastelloy C Inert 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 61
Hastelloy C Hastelloy C Silicone 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 62
Hastelloy C Hastelloy C Inert 1/2 NPT External Thread, 1/4 NPT Internal Thread 63
5. Flameproof Transmitter Prepared for Foxboro Model Coded Seals (b)
Flameproof Transmitter Prepared for Direct Connect Seal; Silicone Fill in Sensor (c) D5
Flameproof Transmitter Prepared for Direct Connect Seal; Inert Fill in Sensor (IGP10 only) (c) D6
Flameproof Transmitter Prepared for Remote Mount Seal; Silicone Fill in Sensor (d) S5
Flameproof Transmitter Prepared for Remote Mount Seal; Inert Fill in Sensor (IGP10 only) (d) S6
6. Flameproof Transmitter Prepared for non-Foxboro Seals
Flameproof Transmitter Prepared for Remote Seal; Silicone Fill in Sensor (e) SH
Flameproof Transmitter Prepared for Remote Seal; Inert Fill in Sensor (f) SJ
Span Limits - Absolute or Gauge Pressure Units, as Applicable

MPa psi bar or kg/cm2
0.007 and 0.21 1 and 30 0.07 and 2.1 C
0.07 and 2.1 10 and 300 0.7 and 21 D
0.7 and 21 100 and 3000 7 and 210 E
14 and 42 2000 and 6000 140 and 420 (IGP10 only) F
Model Code continued on next page

PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 26
M O D E L C O D E S ( C ON T .)

Description (Cont,) Model
Conduit Connection and Housing Material
1/2 NPT Conduit Connection, Aluminum Housing 1
PG 13.5 Conduit Connection, Aluminum Housing (With Electrical Safety Codes E, D, M, N, and P only) 2
1/2 NPT Conduit Connection, 316 ss Housing 3
PG 13.5 Conduit Connection, 316 ss Housing (With Electrical Safety Codes E, D, M, N, and P only) 4
M20 Conduit Connection, Both Sides, Aluminum Housing (With Electrical Safety Codes E, D, M, N, and P only) 5
M20 Conduit Connection, Both Sides, 316 ss Housing (With Electrical Safety Codes E, D, M, N, and P only) 6
Electrical Safety (Also See Electrical Safety Specifications Section)
ATEX II 1 GD, EEx ia IIC, Zone 0 E
ATEX II 2 GD, EEx d IIC, Zone 1 (g)(j) D
ATEX II 3 GD, EEx nL IIC, Zone 2 N
ATEX Multiple Certifications (includes ATEX Codes E and N) M
(See Electrical Safety Specifications section for user marking)
ATEX Multiple Certifications (includes ATEX Codes E, D, and N) (g)(j) P
(See Electrical Safety Specifications section for user marking)
CSA Certifications: (h) C
Division 1 intrinsically safe, explosionproof, dust-ignitionproof
Zone certified Ex ia IIC and energy limited Ex nA II
Division 2, Classes I, II, and III
CSA zone certified flameproof Ex d IIC; also all certifications of Code C above (g)(j) B
FM Approvals: (h) F
Zone approved AEx ia IIC
Division 2 nonincendive, Classes I, II, and III
FM approved flameproof AEx d IIC; also all approvals of Code F above (g)(j) G
IECEx intrinsically safe, Ex ia IIC T
IECEx protection n, Ex nL IIC U
IECEx flameproof, Ex d IIC (g)(j) V
Optional Selections See descriptions below.
Mounting Bracket Set (i)
Painted Steel Bracket with Plated Steel Bolts, 1/2 NPT (with Conduit Connection Codes 1 and 3 only) -M1
Stainless Steel Bracket with Stainless Steel Bolts, 1/2 NPT (with Conduit Connection Codes 1 and 3 only) -M2
Painted Steel Bracket with Plated Steel Bolts, PG 13.5 (with Conduit Connection Codes 2 and 4 only) -M3
Stainless Steel Bracket with Stainless Steel Bolts, PG 13.5 (with Conduit Connection Codes 2 and 4 only) -M4
Painted Steel Bracket with Plated Steel Bolts, M20 (with Conduit Connection Codes 5 and 6 only) -M5
Stainless Steel Bracket with Stainless Steel Bolts, M20 (with Conduit Connection Codes 5 and 6 only) -M6
Digital Indicator with Pushbuttons
Digital Indicator, Pushbuttons, and Window Cover -L1
Vent Screw and Block & Bleed Valve
316 ss Vent Screw in Process Connection (Not with Structure Codes 32 or 33, or Pressure Seals) -V1
Block and Bleed Valve, Carbon Steel (Not with Pressure Seals) -V2
Block and Bleed Valve, 316 ss (Not with Pressure Seals) -V3
Block and Bleed Valve, 316 ss w/Monel Trim (Not with Pressure Seals) -V4
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 27
M O D E L C O D E S ( C O NT .)

Conduit Thread Adapters
Hawke-Type 1/2 NPT Cable Gland for use with Conduit Connection Codes 1 and 3 only (l) -A1
Plastic PG 13.5 Cable Gland for use with Conduit Connection Codes 2 and 4 only (m) -A2
M20 Connector for use with Conduit Connection Codes 1 and 3 only (l) -A3
Brass PG 13.5 Cable Gland (Trumpet-Shaped) for use with Conduit Connection Codes 2 and 4 only (m) -A4
Electronics Housing Features
External Zero Adjustment -Z1
Custody Transfer Lock and Seal -Z2
External Zero Adjustment and Custody Transfer Lock and Seal -Z3
Custom Factory Configuration
Full Factory Configuration (Requires Configuration Form to be filled out) -C2
Cleaning and Preparation
Unit Degreased - for Silicone Filled Sensors Only -X1
Not for Oxygen/Chlorine Service, Option -V1, or Pressure Seals
Cleaned and Prepared for Oxygen Service - for Inert Filled Sensors Only -X2
Not with Option -V1, or Pressure Seals
Cleaned and Prepared for Chlorine Service - with Structure Code 33 Only -X3
Not with Option -V1, or Pressure Seals
SIL2 Transmitters
SIL2-Certified HART Transmitter -S2
Instruction Books (Common MI, Brochure, and Full Documentation Set on CD-ROM is Standard)
Without Instruction Book and CD - Only “Getting Started” Brochure is supplied -K1
Miscellaneous Optional Selections
G 1/2 B Manometer Process Connection (Not Available with Option -V1 or Pressure Seals) -G
Low Temperature Operative Limit of Electronics Housing Extended Down to -50°C (-58°F) (n) -J
R 1/2 Process Connection (1/2 NPT to R 1/2 Adapter) (p) -R
Supplemental Customer Tag (Stainless Steel Tag wired onto Transmitter) -T
(a) Refer to PSS 2A-1C13 F for very high GP versions with upper range limits of 52, 105, and 210 MPa (7500, 15000, and 30000 psi).
Refer to PSS 2A-1C13 K and PSS 2A-1C13 L for AP and GP versions for sanitary and pulp/paper industries, respectively.
(b) Both transmitter and pressure seal Model Numbers are required. Refer to PSS 2A-1Z11 A for pressure seal Model Codes.
(c) Direct Connect Seal Models that may be specified are PSTAD, PSFAD, and PSISD.
(d) Remote Mount Seal Models that may be specified are PSFPS, PSFES, PSFAR, PSTAR, PSISR, PSSCR, and PSSSR.
(e) For transmitters with Silicone fill prepared for remote seal by others, specify Structure Code 22 or 52.
(f) For transmitters with Inert fill prepared for remote seal by others, specify Structure Code 23 or 53.
(g) Electrical Safety Codes B, D, G, V, and P are only available with flameproof transmitter Structure Codes 52, 53, 60, 61, 62, 63, D5,
D6, S5, S6, SH, and SJ.
(h) Electrical Safety Codes C and F are not available with flameproof transmitter Structure Codes 52, 53, 60, 61, 62, 63, D5, D6, S5, S6,
SH, and SJ.
(j) A cover lock is provided as standard with Electrical Safety Codes B, D, G, V, and P.
(k) Mounting sets not offered with direct mounted seals, except if a direct mounted PSTAD threaded seal with a 1/4 NPT process
connection is used, then a mounting set is recommended.
(l) Available with Electrical Safety Codes E, D, M, N, and P only.
(m) Available with Electrical Safety Code E only.
(n) Not available with Inert fill in sensor or seal.
(p) Not available with pressure seals, or Hastelloy C sensors.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 28

Description Model
I/A Series, Electronic, Bracket-Mounted Absolute Pressure Transmitter IAP20
I/A Series, Electronic, Bracket-Mounted Gauge Pressure Transmitter IGP20
Electronics Versions and Output Signal
Intelligent; Digital HART and 4 to 20 mA dc (Version -T) -T
Structure Code - Select from one of the following three groups:
1. Transmitter
Hi-Side Cover Sensor Sensor Fill Fluid
Steel Co-Ni-Cr Silicone 10
Steel Co-Ni-Cr Inert 11
Steel 316L ss Silicone 12
Steel 316L ss Inert 13
Steel Hastelloy C Silicone 16
Steel Hastelloy C Inert 17
316 ss Co-Ni-Cr Silicone 20
316 ss Co-Ni-Cr Inert 21
316 ss 316L ss Silicone 22
316 ss 316L ss Inert 23
316 ss 316L ss, Gold Plated Silicone 2G
316 ss Monel Silicone 24
316 ss Monel Inert 25
316 ss Hastelloy C Silicone 26
316 ss Hastelloy C Inert 27
Monel Monel Silicone 34
Monel Monel Inert 35
Hastelloy C Hastelloy C Silicone 46
Hastelloy C Hastelloy C Inert 47
Hastelloy C Tantalum Silicone 48
Hastelloy C Tantalum Inert 49
2. Transmitter Prepared for Foxboro Model Coded Seals (b)
Transmitter Prepared for Remote Seal on HI Side; Silicone fill in sensor S3 (c)
Transmitter Prepared for Remote Seal on HI Side; Inert fill in sensor (IGP20 only) S4 (c)
Transmitter Prepared for PSFLT, PSSCT, or PSSST Seal, HI Side; Silicone fill in sensor (IGP20 only) F1
Transmitter Prepared for PSFLT, PSSCT, or PSSST Seal, HI Side; Inert fill in sensor (IGP20 only) F2
3. Transmitter Prepared for non-Foxboro Seals
Transmitter Prepared for Remote Seal; Silicone Fill in Sensor SC
Transmitter Prepared for Remote Seal; Inert Fill in Sensor SD
Span Limits (Absolute or Gauge Pressure Units)
kPa inH2O mbar
0.12 and 7.5 0.5 and 30 1.2 and 75 (IGP20 only) A (d)
0.87 and 50 3.5 and 200 8.7 and 500 B
MPa psi bar or kg/cm2
0.007 and 0.21 1 and 30 0.07 and 2.1 C
0.07 and 2.1 10 and 300 0.7 and 21 D
0.7 and 21 100 and 3000 7 and 210 E (e)
1.38 and 35 200 and 5000 13.8 and 350 (IGP20 only)
F (e)
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 29
M O D E L C O D E S ( C O NT .)

Process Connector Type (Material Same as Process Cover Material)
None; connect directly to process cover (not available with Structure Codes 78 and 79) 0
1/4 NPT (not available with Structure Codes 46, 47, 48, 49, 78, 79) 1
1/2 NPT (not available with Structure Codes 78, 79) 2
Rc 1/4 (not available with Structure Codes 46, 47, 48, 49, 78, 79) 3
Rc 1/2 (not available with Structure Codes 78, 79) 4
1/2 Schedule 80 Welding Neck (not available with Structure Codes 46, 47, 48, 49, 78, 79) 6
None; pvdf (Kynar) insert tapped for 1/2 NPT on side of 316 ss Process Cover (only with Codes 78/79) 7
Conduit Connection and Housing Material
1/2 NPT Conduit Connection, Aluminum Housing 1
PG 13.5 Conduit Connection, Aluminum Housing (With Electrical Safety Codes E, D, M, and N only) 2
1/2 NPT Conduit Connection, 316 ss Housing 3
PG 13.5 Conduit Connection, 316 ss Housing (With Electrical Safety Codes E, D, M, and N only) 4
M20 Conduit Connection, Both Sides, Aluminum Housing 5
M20 Conduit Connection, Both Sides, 316 ss Housing 6
Electrical Safety (Also see Electrical Safety Specifications section)
ATEX II 1 GD, EEx ia IIC, Zone 0
ATEX II 2 GD, EEx d IIC, Zone 1 (n) E
ATEX II 3 GD, EEx nL IIC, Zone 2 D
ATEX Multiple Certifications (includes ATEX Codes E, D, and N) (n) N
(See Electrical Safety Specifications section for user marking) M
CSA Certifications: C
Zone certified Ex ia IIC and energy limited Ex nA II
Division 2, Classes I, II, and III
CSA zone certified flameproof Ex d IIC; also all certifications of Code C above (h) B
FM Approvals: F
Zone approved AEx ia IIC
Division 2 nonincendive, Classes I, II, and III
FM approved flameproof AEx d IIC; also all approvals of Code F above (h) G
IECEx intrinsically safe, Ex ia IIC T
IECEx protection n, Ex nL IIC U
IECEx flameproof, Ex d IIC V
Optional Selections
Refer to Optional Selection descriptions below.
Mounting Bracket Set - Not available with Direct Connect Seals, Structure Codes F1 and F2
Standard Style Painted Steel Bracket with Plated Steel Bolts -M1
Standard Style Stainless Steel Bracket with Stainless Steel Bolts -M2
Universal Style Stainless Steel Bracket with Stainless Steel Bolts -M3

PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 30

Optional Selections (Cont.)
Digital Indicator with Pushbuttons
Digital Indicator, Pushbuttons, and Window Cover -L1
Process Cover
Cover Screw Connector Screw
Type Material Size Material
Single Ended (f) Steel M10 (by User) N/A -D1
Double Ended (f)(g) Steel M10 Steel -D2
(Blind Kidney Flange on back)
Single Ended Steel 7/16 (by User) N/A -D3
Double Ended (f)(g) Steel 7/16 Steel -D4
Single Ended (f) 316 ss 7/16 (by User) N/A -D5
Double Ended (f)(g) 316 ss 7/16 316 ss
-D6
Single Ended 17-4 ss 7/16 (by User) N/A
Double Ended (f)(g) 17-4 ss 7/16 17-4 ss -D7
(Blind Kidney Flange on back) -D8
Cleaning and Preparation - Not Available w/Gold-Plated Sensor, Structure 2G (h)
Unit Degreased - for Silicone Filled Sensors Only -X1
(Not for Oxygen/Chlorine/Other Fluids that may react with Silicone)
Cleaned and Prepared for Oxygen Service - for Inert Filled Sensors Only -X2
(Not available with Carbon Steel Covers or with Silicone Filled Sensors)
Cleaned and Prepared for Chlorine Service - for Inert Filled Sensors Only (i) -X3
(Not available with Carbon Steel Covers or with Silicone Filled Sensors)
Bolting for Process Covers/Connectors (j)
316 ss Bolts and Nuts (Pressure Derated) (f) -B1
17-4 ss Bolts and Nuts (i) -B2
B7M Bolts and Nuts (NACE)(Pressure Derated) (f) -B3
Conduit Thread Adapters
Hawke-Type 1/2 NPT Cable Gland for use with Conduit Connection Codes 1 and 3 (k) -A1
Plastic PG 13.5 Cable Gland for use with Conduit Connection Codes 2 and 4 (l) -A2
M20 Connector for use with Conduit Connection Codes 1 and 3 (k) -A3
Brass PG 13.5 Cable Gland (Trumpet-Shaped) for use with Conduit Connection Codes 2 and 4 (l) -A4
Electronics Housing Features
External Zero Adjustment -Z1
Custody Transfer Lock and Seal -Z2
External Zero Adjustment and Custody Transfer Lock and Seal -Z3
Custom Factory Configuration
Full Factory Configuration (Requires Configuration Form to be filled out) -C2
Tubing Connectors - Specify Only One (Only 316 ss process covers; no side vents on cover) (h)
Steel, Connecting 6 mm Tubing to 1/4 NPT Process Connector -E1
Steel, Connecting 12 mm Tubing to 1/2 NPT Process Connector -E2
316 ss, Connecting 6 mm Tubing to 1/4 NPT Process Connector -E3
316 ss, Connecting 12 mm Tubing to 1/2 NPT Process Connector -E4
Gaskets
Gasket for Vacuum Service with Pressure Seals (m) -G1
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 31
AP20 and IGP20 Transmitters (Cont.)

Optional Selections (Cont.)
SIL Transmitters
SIL-Certified Transmitter -S2
Instruction Books (Common MI, Brochure, and Full Documentation Set on CD-ROM is Standard)
Without Instruction Book and CD - Only “Getting Started” Brochure is supplied -K1
Miscellaneous Optional Selections
Low Temperature Operative Limit of Electronics Housing Extended Down to -50°C (-58°F) -J
Not available with sensors and seals with Inert fill, Structure Codes 78 and 79,
or DIN Options -D2, -D4, -D6, and -D8
Vent Screw in side of Process Cover (with 316 ss process covers only) -V (h)
Not available with seals, DIN construction options, or Structure Codes 78 and 79
Supplemental Customer Tag (Stainless Steel Tag wired onto Transmitter) -T
Examples: IGP20-T20B21F-M1Z2; IAP20-TS3C11F-T

(a) Maximum overrange pressure is 2.1 MPa (300 psi); temperature limits are -7 and +82°C (20 and 180°F).
(b) Transmitter and Pressure Seal Model Codes are both required. See PSS 2A-1Z11 A for the various pressure seal model codes.
(c) Remote Seal Models that may be specified are PSFPS, PSFES, PSFAR, PSTAR, PSISR, PSSCR, and PSSSR.
(d) Span Limit Code A is not available with pressure seals (Structure Codes F1, F2, S3, S4, SC, SD).
(e) Span Limit Codes E and F not available with Structure Codes 78 and 79 (pvdf insert in HI Side Cover).
(f) Pressure derated. See derating table in specifications section.
(g) Temperature limits derated to 0 and 60°C (32 and 140°F). Also Mounting Sets -M1 and -M2 not available.
(h) Not available when Remote Mount or Direct Connect Pressure Seals are specified.
(i) When -X3 is specified, the standard bolting is replaced with 17-4 ss bolts and nuts. Therefore, there is no need to specify Option -B2
when selecting the Chlorine Service Option -X3.
(j) Not available with DIN construction options. For stainless steel bolts with DIN construction, specify -D5 to -D8, as required.
(k) Available with Electrical Safety Codes E, D, M, and N only.
(l) Available with Electrical Safety Code E only.
(m) Standard offering with IAP20 Transmitters with pressure seals. However, -G1 is a required option with IGP20 Transmitters when
pressure seal (Structure Codes S3, S4, F1, F2, SC, and SD) will be used in vacuum applications. This option substitutes vacuum
service metal gasket for standard ptfe process cover gasket.
(n) A cover lock is provided as standard with Electrical Safety Codes D, B, G, and M.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 32
S U G GE S T E D R F Q S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
The manufacturer shall provide direct connected or bracket mounted pressure transmitters featuring remote
digital communications capability for measuring absolute or gauge pressure and transmitting a 4 to 20 mA
output with a superimposed HART digital signal for use in a standard two-wire dc supply voltage system.
These transmitters shall also be provided (as required) with direct connect pressure seals, or remote mount
capillary connected pressure seals. The specifications for these transmitters are as follows:
Communication Protocol: HART, 4 to 20 mA dc, and digital output signal.

Remote Communications: Must not interfere with output.
Accuracy: Digital Output: ±0.050% of calibrated span.
4 to 20 mA Output: ±0.060% of calibrated span.
RFI Protection: 0.1% error between 27 and 1000 MHz at 30 V/m field intensity
Proof Pressure: 120, 1200, 11 500, or 22 000 psi for direct connected transmitters;
27 250 psi for bracket mounted transmitters, as specified.
Span Limits: From 1 to 6000 psi for standard direct connected transmitters; and from 0.5
inH2O to 5000 psi for standard bracket mounted transmitters, as specified; or SI
and Metric equivalents.
Electronics Housing: IEC IP66 (NEMA 4X); 316 ss or aluminum housing with Epoxy finish; two
compartments (field wiring and electronics); housing sealed with O-rings for
double protection against moisture or other contaminants.
Modular Electronics: Easily replaceable modular electronics; optional integral LCD Digital Indicator with
on-board configuration pushbuttons.
Mounting: Direct to process or bracket mounted to pipe or surface.
Process Connection: IAP10/IGP10 Transmitters: Direct to process piping or pressure seal
with 1/2 NPT; optional Rc 1/2 or G 1/2 B external threads to process piping.
Internal 1/4 NPT thread also provided as plumbing connection to process; or
prepared for a direct connect seal or capillary connected seal.
IAP20/IGP20 Transmitters: Used with process connectors to accept
1/4 NPT, 1/2 NPT, Rc 1/4, Rc 1/2, Schedule 80 welding neck; or a pvdf insert
(tapped for 1/2 NPT) in HI side process cover is used as process connection.
Process connection can also be prepared to accept a direct connect seal; or
prepared for a remote capillary connected seal.
Process Cover Materials Available: Applicable to IAP20/IGP20 transmitters only. Industry Standard 316 ss, Carbon
Steel, Monel, and Hastelloy C.
Sensor Materials: Co-Ni-Cr, 316L ss, and Hastelloy C for IAP10/IGP10 transmitters; and Co-Ni-Cr,
316L ss, Hastelloy C, Monel, Tantalum, and Gold-Plated 316L ss for
IAP20/IGP20 transmitters.
Electrical Classification: Nonincendive for Class I and Class II, Division 2 locations; intrinsically safe or
explosionproof for Class I and Class II, Division 1 locations. Versions available to
meet Agency flameproof and zone requirements; comply with applicable
European Union Directives.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 33
S U G G E S T E D R F Q S P E C I F I C AT I O N S ( C O N T .)
Approximate Mass: Direct Connected Transmitter: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)

Bracket-Mounted Transmitter: 3.5 kg (7.8 lb) w/o process connector
4.2 kg (9.2 lb) w/process connector
With 316 ss Electronics Housing: Add 1.1 kg (2.4 lb)
With Optional LCD Indicator: Add 0.2 kg (0.4 lb)
With Pressure Seals: See PSS 2A-1Z11 A
Model Code: I/A Series IGP10 or IAP10 Direct Connected Gauge or Absolute Pressure
Transmitters; or IGP20 or IAP20 Bracket Mounted Gauge or Absolute Pressure
Transmitters; all with HART Communication Protocol; with or without pressure
seals; or equivalent.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 34
D I M EN S I O N S - N O M I N A L
IAP10 AND IGP10 DIRECT CONNNECTED TRANSMITTERS mm
in
CONDUIT EXTENDED 137

COVER 5.4 ALLOW 50 mm
CONNECTION 84 124
USED WITH (2 in) CLEARANCE
(SEE NOTE 1) 3.3 4.9
OPTIONAL LCD FOR COVER
INDICATOR REMOVAL BOTH
ENDS (NOTE 5)
CONDUIT
TERMINALS
+
FIELD
CONNECTION
(SEE NOTE 1)
193 165
7.6 OPTIONAL 6.5 EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL EARTH FIELD TERMINAL
ZERO OPTIONAL (GROUND) CONNECTIONS
ADJUSTMENT CUSTODY
TRANSFER
FLAMEPROOF LOCK (SEAL)
VERSION 32 BOTH ENDS 23
1.25 0.9
PROCESS CONNECTION 1/2 NPT
(ACROSS FLATS)
EXTERNAL THREAD AND 1/4 NPT
INTERNAL THREAD (NOTE 6)
IAP20 AND IGP20 BRACKET MOUNTED TRANSMITTERS
137
5.4 124 84
CONDUIT CONDUIT
4.9 3.3 CONNECTION
CONNECTION
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
TERMINALS
EXTERNAL +
FIELD
EARTH PROCESS
(GROUND) CONNECTOR
TYPE 7
H-L OR L-H PROCESS STANDARD
INDICATES CONNECTOR VENT/
HIGH OR LOW SEE NOTE 2 DRAIN ON
PRESSURE SIDE H-L
HIGH SIDE
OPTIONAL 208
VENT/DRAIN 8.2
pvdf INSERT
SEE NOTE 3 41.3 TAPPED FOR
1.626 1/2 NPT ON
PROCESS
HIGH SIDE
CONNECTOR
COVER AND
ON HIGH SIDE 119 33 64 USED AS
ONLY (NOTE 4) 4.7 1.3 2.5 PROCESS
114 CONNECTOR.
4.5
NOTES
1. CONDUIT CONNECTION 1/2 NPT, PG 13.5, OR M20, BOTH SIDES : PLUG UNUSED CONNECTION WITH METAL PLUG
(SUPPLIED).
2. PROCESS CONNECTOR CAN BE REMOVED AND CONNECTION MADE DIRECTLY TO PROCESS COVER USING 1/4 NPT
INTERNAL THREAD IN PROCESS COVER. NOTE THAT WITH PROCESS CONNECTION CODE "0", THERE IS NO CONNECTOR.
3. PROCESS COVER CAN BE INVERTED MAKING OPTIONAL SIDE VENT A SIDE DRAIN.
4. FOR USERS WHO DESIRE THE PROCESS CONNECTOR ON THE RIGHT SIDE, MERELY ROTATE TRANSMITTER 180˚ AND
RELOCATE PROCESS CONNECTOR SHOWN TO THE RIGHT SIDE.
5. TOPWORKS ROTATABLE TO ANY POSITION WITHIN ONE TURN COUNTERCLOCKWISE OF FULLY TIGHTENED POSITION.
6. DO NOT USE THE 1/4 NPT INTERNAL THREAD TO DIRECT-CONNECT THE TRANSMITTER.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 35
D I M EN S I O N S - N O M I N A L ( CO N T . )
IAP10/IGP10 WITH OPTIONS -M1 TO -M6 mm

SPACER THREADS INTO FOR HORIZONTAL in
CONDUIT CONNECTION PIPE MOUNTING
(U-BOLT IS
ROTATED 90°)
VERTICAL PIPE
MOUNTING
MOUNTING BRACKET REQUIRED
WHEN USING 1/4 NPT INTERNAL
PROCESS CONNECTION THREAD.
IAP20/IGP20 WITH OPTIONS -M1, -M2, AND -M3 IAP20/IGP20 WITH DIN CONSTRUCTION OPTIONS
SINGLE ENDED PROCESS DOUBLE ENDED PROCESS
COVER OPTIONS COVER OPTIONS
-D1, -D3, -D5, -D7 -D2, -D4, -D6, -D8
PROCESS
CONNECTION
H-L THIS END ONLY.
BLIND PROCESS
FLANGE CONNECTION
-M1/-M2
STANDARD
BRACKET.
ROTATE 64
-M3 UNVERSAL STYLE BRACKET. 99
U-BOLT 90° FOR 2.5
ROTATE BRACKET FOR VERTICAL 3.9
HORIZONTAL
PIPE PIPE.
IAP10/IGP10 IAP10/IGP10 IAP10/IGP10 IAP10/IGP10

OPTION -V1 OPTION -G OPTION -R -V2, -V3, -V4
165 168
6.5 6.6 203 244
8.0 9.6
NOTE NOTE 48
27 mm 1.9
(1.1 in) NOTE NOTE
48
VENT SCREW HEX 89
23 25 1.9
5/32 INCH HEAD 3.5
0.9 1.0 PROCESS
SOCKET HEAD
CONNECTION
PROCESS 64
G 1/2 B
CONNECTION R 1/2 PROCESS 2.5
NOTES CONNECTION 1/2 NPT
1. FOR FLAMEPROOF TRANSMITTERS, ADD 28 mm (1.1in) TO OVERALL HEIGHT DIMENSION.
2. REFER TO DIMENSIONAL PRINT DP 020-447 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION.
PSS 2A-1C13 B
Page 36
O RD E RI N G I N S T R U C T I O N S
1. Model Number(s) as follows:

Transmitter only if pressure seals are not selected
Both transmitter and pressure seal if pressure seal is selected. See PSS 2A-1Z11 A.
2. Calibrated Pressure Range (using Allowable Pressure Units from the table below).
inH2O inHg kPa mbar kg/cm2
ftH2O mmHg MPa bar psi
mmH2O Pa torr g/cm2 atm
mH2O – – – –
(a) Absolute or gauge pressure units, as applicable. The suffix (a) is
added to the unit to indicate absolute pressure; e.g., psia, MPaa.
3. Configuration Data Form when Factory Calibration Option -C2 is specified.
4. If Option -S2 (SIL-Certified HART Transmitter) is selected, a copy of the certification can be
provided by specifying AS Code CERT-L.
5. Options and Accessories not in Model Code (see PSS 2A-1Z9 E).
6. User Tag Data - Data Plate; 32 characters maximum. For additional tag data, specify Optional
Supplemental Tag -T.
7. User Tag Data - Software (Database); 8 characters maximum (user configured).
O T H E R M & I P R O D UC T S
IPS provides a broad range of measurement and instrument

products, including solutions for pressure, flow, analytical,
positioners, temperature, controlling and recording. For a listing of
these offerings, visit the IPS web site at:
www.ips.invensys.com
IPS Corporate Headquarters Invensys, Foxboro, d/p Cell, FoxCom, and I/A Series
5601 Granite Parkway Suite 1000 are trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries, and
Plano, TX 75024 affiliates.
www.ips.invensys.com All other brand names may be trademarks of their
respective owners.
Foxboro Global Client Support
Inside U.S.: 1-866-746-6477 Copyright 1997-2009 Invensys Systems, Inc.
Outside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 or contact All rights reserved
your local Foxboro representative.
Facsimile: 1-508-549-4999 MB 010 Printed in U.S.A. 0309
Modular Type AR20-NO2BE-Z
Regulator
Series AR
Regulator Model Port size Accessory
Series AR
AR10 M5 x 0.8
AR20 1/8, 1/4
AR25 1/4, 3/8
AR30 1/4, 3/8
AR40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
AR40-06 3/4 Bracket

Square
AR50 3/4, 1 embedded type
pressure gauge
Pages 36 through 40 AR60 1 (except for AR10)
Regulator with back flow mechanism Round pressure

AR20K 1/8, 1/4 gauge
Series ARK
Panel mount
AR25K 1/4, 3/8
AR30K 1/4, 3/8
AR40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
AR40K-06 3/4
AR50K 3/4, 1
Pages 43 through 48 AR60K 1
35
Regulator
AR10 to 60 AR20-N02BE-Z
How to Order
AR 30 F 03 BE 1N
Optional specifications
Regulator Symbol Description Applicable model
1 Note 2) 0.02 to 0.2MPa setting AR10 to 60
Body size N Non-relieving AR10 to 60
10 20 25 30 40 50 60 R Flow direction: Right to left AR10 to 60
Y Upward handle AR10 to 60
AR20 Thread type Z Note 3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR10 to 60
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending alphanumeric order.
Metric thread (M5) Note 1) This product is for overseas use only according to the new Measurement Law.
Nil (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Rc
Note 2) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for the
N NPT regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2MPa or more.
F G Note 3) For M5 and NPT thread types.
Port size
Accessories
Port Body size
Symbol Symbol Description Applicable model
size 10 20 25 30 40 50 60
M5 M5 — — — — — — Nil — —
01 1/8 — — — — — — B With bracket AR10 to 60
02 1/4 — — — E With square embedded type pressure gauge (with limit indicator) AR20 to 60
03 3/8 — — — — With round pressure gauge (without limit indicator) AR10
04 1/2 — — — — — — G With round pressure gauge (with limit indicator) AR20 to 60
06 3/4 — — — — — H With set nut (for panel mount) AR10 to 40
AR40 10 1 — — — — — Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of shipment
(except for option E).
: Combination available : Combination not available

Accessory/Optional specification combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Combination Accessory Optional specification Applicable regulator
Symbol
Accessory/Optional specifications B E G H 1 N R Y Z AR10 AR20 to 40 AR50 to 60
specifications Accessories
With bracket (with set nut) B

Square embedded type pressure gauge E
Round pressure gauge G
Made to
Order With set nut (for panel mount) H
Page 41
0.02 to 0.2MPa setting –1
Optional
Non-relieving type –N
Flow direction: Right to left –R
Upward handle –Y
Name plate and pressure gauge
in imperial units (PSI, °F) –Z
Standard specifications
Model AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
Port sizes M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8
1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.7MPa 0.05 to 0.85MPa
Pressure gauge port size Note 1) Rc 1/16 Note 2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05MPa Note 3) [at relief flow rate of 0.1L/min (ANR)]
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.06 0.26 0.21 0.29 0.44 0.47 1.17 1.22
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulator with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AR20 to AR60).
Note 2) Use a bushing (part no: 131368) when connecting the R 1/8 pressure gauge to the R 1/16 gauge port.
Note 3) Except for AR10.
Accessory part no.

Applicable model
AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
Accessory
Bracket assembly Note 1) AR10P-270AS AR20P-270AS AR25P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR50P-270AS Note 5) AR50P-270AS Note 5)
Set nut AR10P-260S AR20P-260S AR25P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S — Note 6) — Note 6)
Round G27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
Note 2) 1MPa Square Note 4)
Pressure embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
gauge Round G27-10-R1 Note 3) G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2MPa Square Note 4)
embedded type — GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts. Note 3) For 1.0MPa.
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection Note 4) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N for NPT. Note 5) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Contact P/A regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply Note 6) Contact P/A regarding the set nuts for AR50 and AR60.
for PSI unit specifications.
36
AR10 to 60
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7MPa
Specific Product Precautions AR10 M5 AR40 Rc 1/2

0.6 0.6
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 75 through 78 for safety 0.5 0.5
instructions and F.R.L. unit precau-
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa

tions. 0.4 0.4
Mounting & Adjustment 0.3 0.3
Warning 0.2 0.2
1. Set the regulator while verifying the

0.1 0.1
displayed values of the inlet and outlet
pressure gauges. Turning the knob
excessively can cause damage to the 00 25 50 75 100 125 150 00
1000 2000 3000
internal parts. Flow rate L/min (ANR) Flow rate L/min (ANR)
2. The pressure gauge included with
regulators for 0.02 to 0.2MPa setting is for AR20 Rc 1/4 AR40-06 Rc 3/8
up to 0.2MPa use only. Exceeding 0.2MPa 0.6 0.6
of pressure can damage the gauge.
Nevertheless, the gauge for the AR10 0.5 0.5
regulator with 0.02 to 0.2MPa setting is for
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa

up to 1.0MPa use. 0.4 0.4
3. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator
knob as this may cause damage. It must 0.3 0.3
be operated manually.
0.2 0.2
Caution 0.1 0.1
1. Be sure to unlock the knob before adjusting

the pressure and lock it after setting the 0
0 200 400 600 800
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
pressure.
Flow rate L/min (ANR) Flow rate L/min (ANR)
Failure to follow this procedure can cause
damage to the knob and the outlet AR25 Rc 3/8 AR50 Rc 1
pressure may fluctuate. 0.6 0.6
• Pull the pressure regulator knob to unlock.
(You can visually verify this with the 0.5 0.5
"orange mark" that appears in the gap.)
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
• Push the pressure regulator knob to lock. 0.4 0.4

When the knob is not easily locked, turn it
left and right a little and then push it (when 0.3 0.3
the knob is locked, the "orange mark", i.e.,
the gap will disappear). 0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0
0 500 1000 1500 0 5000 10000
Orange mark Flow rate L/min (ANR) Flow rate L/min (ANR)
AR30 Rc 3/8 AR60 Rc 1

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
2. A knob cover is available to prevent care-

Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
0.4 0.4
less operation of the knob. Refer to Fea-
tures 1 for details.
0.3 0.3
3. Contact P/A when using the regulator be-
tween a solenoid valve and an actuator.
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0 5000 10000
0 500 1000 1500 0
37
Regulator AR10 to 60
Conditions:
Inlet pressure 0.7MPa
Outlet pressure 0.2MPa
Pressure Characteristics (Representative values) Flow rate 20L/min (ANR)
AR10 AR40
0.3
0.25
0.25 Set point

Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa

Set point
0.2
0.2
0.15
0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure MPa Inlet pressure MPa
AR20 AR40-06
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AR25 AR50
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AR30 AR60
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
38
AR10 to 60
Construction
AR10 AR20, 25
t
t
q
IN OUT
e
IN OUT
e q
r r
w
w
AR30, 40 AR50, 60
t t q
q
e e
IN OUT IN OUT
r w
w
r
Parts list
Material
No. Description Note
AR10, 20 AR25 to 40 (-60) AR50, 60
1 Body Zinc die-cast Aluminum die-cast Platinum silver
2 Bonnet Polyacetal Aluminum die-cast Black
Replacement parts
Part no.
No. Description Materials
AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
Valve assembly Stainless steel
3 AR10P-090S AR20P-090AS AR25P-090AS AR30P-090AS AR40P-090AS AR40P-090AS AR50P-090AS AR60P-090AS
Brass, HNBR
4 Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR10P-150AS Note) AR20P-150AS AR25P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR50P-150AS AR50P-150AS
5 Valve guide assembly POM 131329 AR20P-050AS AR25P-050AS AR30P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR50P-050AS AR60P-050AS
Note) AR10 is a piston and gasket (KSYP-13) type assembly.
39
Regulator AR10 to 60
Dimensions
AR10 to 40 Square embedded type

pressure gauge (option)
Port size Panel fitting dimension
A D U
C
IN T OUT
IN OUT V
S
Plate thickness
L
Pressure gauge AR10 to AR30: Max. 3.5
B
(option)
AR40: Max. 5
Pressure gauge
M
port
N Q
K F J
P E Bracket
(option)
AR50, 60 Square embedded type Port size

A pressure gauge (option) D
C
IN OUT
G
Pressure gauge
(option)
L
B
Pressure gauge
port
M
N
Bracket
(option)
Q
K F
P E J
Accessory specification
Standard specification
Model Port sizes With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount
A C B D E F G J K L M N P Q S T U V
AR10 M5 x 0.8 25 11 58 25 26 — 0 25 28 30 4.5 6.5 40 2 18 18.5 — —
AR20 1/8, 1/4 40 26.5 94 57 65 29.5 2 Note) 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 25 28.5 14 6
AR25 1/4, 3/8 53 28 101 55 64 28.5 0 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 26 32.5 16 6
AR30 1/4, 3/8 53 31 116 59 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7
AR40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 36 128 68 74 35 3.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7
AR40-06 3/4 75 36 129 68 74 35 3 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7
AR50 3/4, 1 90 43 169 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
AR60 1 95 46 176 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
Note) For AR20 only, the position of the pressure gauge is above the center of the piping.
40
Regulator
AR20 to 60
Made to Order Specifications Made to
Order
Contact P/A for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.
q Special Temperature Environment w High Pressure

Special materials are used in the manufacturing of seals and resin Strong materials are used in the manufacturing of air filters
parts to allow them to withstand various temperature conditions in intended for high pressure operation. Also construction modification
cold or tropical (hot) regions. allows a wider regulating pressure range.
Specifications Specifications
Part no. –X430 –X440 Part no. –X425
Environment Low temperature High temperature Proof pressure 3.0MPa
Ambient temperature –30 to 60°C –5 to 80°C Maximum operating pressure 2.0MPa
Fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (with no freezing) Set pressure range 0.1 to 1.6MPa
Rubber parts Special NBR FPM Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Material
Main metal parts Metal (Die-cast aluminum)
Applicable models Applicable models

Model AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60 Model AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
Port size 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1 Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
How to Order How to Order
AR 30 F 03 BG 1N X430 AR 30 F 03 BG N X425
Regulator Regulator
For high/low
Body size temperature For high
Body size pressure
25 30 40 50 60 X430 Low temperature
X440 High temperature 20 25 30 40 50 60
Thread type
Thread type
Nil Rc
N NPT Nil Rc
F G N NPT
F G
Port size
Port size
Port Body size
Symbol Body size
size 25 30 40 50 60 Port
Symbol
size 20 25 30 40 50 60
02 1/4 — —
03 3/8 — — 01 1/8 — — — — —
04 1/2 — — — — 02 1/4 — —
06 3/4 — — — 03 3/8 — — —
10 1 — — — 04 1/2 — — — — —
06 3/4 — — — —
Option Note 1)
10 1 — — — —
Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil — — Option Note 1)
B With bracket AR25 to 60 Symbol Description Applicable model
G Note 2) With round pressure gauge (with limit indicator) AR25 to 60 Nil — —
H With set nut (for panel mount) AR25 to 40 AR20 to 60
B With bracket
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at
the time of shipment.
G Note 2) With round pressure gauge (with limit indicator) AR20 to 60
Note 2) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for AR25 to 30; H With set nut (for panel mount) AR20 to 40
1/4 for AR40 to 60 Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose
Pressure gauge type: G43 at the time of shipment.
Optional specifications Note 2) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for AR20 to 30;
1/4 for AR40 to 60
1 Note 3) 0.02 to 0.2MPa setting AR25 to 60 Optional specifications
N Non-relieving type AR25 to 60 Symbol Description Applicable model
R Flow direction: Right to left AR25 to 60 N Non-relieving AR20 to 60
Y Upward handle AR25 to 60 R Flow direction: Right to left AR20 to 60
Z Note 4) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR25 to 60 Y Upward handle AR20 to 60
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending Z Note 3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR20 to 60
alphanumeric order. ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
Note 3) The only difference from the standard specifications is the alphanumeric order.
adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting Note 3) For thread type NPT.
of 0.2MPa or more. This product is for overseas use only according to the new
Note 4) For thread type NPT. Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in
This product is for overseas use only according to the new Japan.)
Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in
Japan.)
Note 5) Consult P/A for detailed dimensions and available attachments and options.
Note 6) Comes with T type handle.
41
Regulator
AR20(K) to AR60(K)
Made to Order Specifications Made to
Order
Contact P/A for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.
e With Digital Pressure Switch

Digital pressure switch (ISE30---L) is supplied loose for mounting on pressure gauge connection port.
Specifications Applicable models

Part number suffix –X465 Model AR20(K) AR25(K) AR30(K) AR40(K) AR40(K)-06 AR50(K) AR60(K)
Model ISE30---L Port sizes 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Set pressure range (MPa) –0.1 to 1
Pressure
Set and display resolution (MPa) 0.001
switch
12 to 24 VDC ± 10%, Ripple (p-p) 10%
Power supply voltage
or less (with power supply polarity protection)
Power consumption 45 mA or less (70 mA or less for current output)
∗ Pressure gauge port size: 1/8
How to Order
AR 30 K F 03 B 1N X465 A
Regulator Switch specifications
Symbol Output specification
Body size With digital pressure switch A NPN output
20 25 30 40 50 60 (Series ISE30) Note 4) B PNP output
Note 4) Digital pressure switch is not C 1 to 5V output
assembled and are supplied D 4 to 20mA output
Back flow mechanism loose at the time of shipment.
Nil Without back flow mechanism Note 5) Consult P/A for detailed
dimensions and available
K With back flow mechanism attachments and options.
Note 6) Refer to P/A catalog
CAT.ES100-42 for detailed
Thread type specifications and instructions
Nil Rc of digital pressure switch.
N NPT
F G
Optional specifications
Port size Symbol Description Applicable model
1 Note 2) 0.02 to 0.2MPa setting AR20(K) to 60(K)
Port Body size
Symbol size N Non-relieving type AR20(K) to 60(K)
20 25 30 40 50 60 AR20(K) to 60(K)
R Flow direction: Right to left
01 1/8 — — — — — Y Upward handle AR20(K) to 60(K)
02 1/4 — — Z Note 3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR20(K) to 60(K)
03 3/8 — — — ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
alphanumeric order.
04 1/2 — — — — —
Note 2) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting
06 3/4 — — — — spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2MPa or more.
10 1 — — — — Note 3) For thread type NPT.
This product is for overseas use only according to the new Measurement
Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Option Note 1)
Nil — —
B With bracket AR20(K) to 60(K)
H With set nut (for panel mount) AR20(K) to 40(K)
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose
at the time of shipment.
42
Regulator: Modular Type with Back flow Mechanism
AR20K to 60K
How to Order
Regulator with a built-in mechanism that

ensures a quick release of the outlet air AR 30 K F 03 BE 1N
pressure (built-in check valve with back
Regulator Optional specifications
flow mechanism).
Body size Symbol Description Applicable model
1 Note 2) 0.02 to 0.2MPa setting AR20K to 60K
20 25 30 40 50 60 N Non-relieving AR20K to 60K
R Flow direction: Right to left AR20K to 60K
With back flow mechanism Y Upward handle AR20K to 60K
Note) AR10 comes with a back flow mechanism
as a standard feature.
Name plate and pressure
If the set pressure is below 0.15MPa, back Z Note 3) gauge in imperial units AR20K to 60K
flow may not occur. When a backflow
(PSI, °F)
mechanism is required with a set pressure ∗ When more than one specification is
of less than 0.15MPa, contact P/A. required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Note 2) The only difference from the standard
specifications is the adjusting spring for
AR20K AR40K Thread type the regulator. It does not restrict the
Nil Rc Port size setting of 0.2MPa or more.
Example 1) Note 3) For NPT thread type.
When the pressure in the rear and N NPT Port Body size This product is for overseas use only
Symbol
the front of the cylinder differs: F G size 20 25 30 40 50 60 according to the new Measurement Law.
Example 2) 01 1/8 — — — — — (The SI unit type is provided for use in
Circuit diagram Japan.)
When the air supply is cut off and 02 1/4 — —
releasing the inlet pressure to the 03 3/8 — — — Accessories Note 1)
atmosphere, the residual pressure
04 1/2 — — — — — Symbol Description Applicable model
release of the outlet side can be
ensured for a safety purpose. 06 3/4 — — — — Nil — —
10 1 — — — — B With bracket AR20K to 60K
Circuit diagram With square embedded type
E pressure gauge (with limit indicator) AR20K to 60K
G With round pressure gauge AR20K to 60K
(with limit indicator)
H With set nut (for panel mount) AR20K to 40K
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are

supplied loose at the time of shipment (ex-
cept for option E).
Standard specifications
Model AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Port sizes 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0MPa
Set pressure range Note 1) 0.05 to 0.85MPa
Pressure gauge port size Note 2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05MPa [at relief flow rate of 0.1L/min (ANR)]
Ambient and fluid temperature –5° to 60°C (with no freezing)
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.26 0.21 0.30 0.45 0.48 1.17 1.22
∗ AR10 comes with a back flow mechanism as a standard feature. Note 1) Set the inlet pressure 0.05MPa or higher than the set pressure.
Note 2) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a
square embedded type pressure gauge (AR20K to AR60K).
Accessory part no.
Accessory Applicable model AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Bracket assembly Note 1) AR20P-270AS AR25P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR50P-270AS Note 3) AR50P-270AS Note 3)
Set nut AR20P-260S AR25P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S — Note 5) — Note 5)
Round G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
Note 2) 1.0MPa Square Note 4)
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
gauge Round G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2MPa Square Note 4)
embedded type GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts.
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary
for R; however, indicate N for NPT.
Contact P/A regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 3) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 4) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 5) Contact P/A regarding the set nut for AR50K and 60K.
43
Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism AR20K to 60K
Operating Principle
Specific Product Precautions
A
A-A
w Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 75 through 78 for safety
instructions and F.R.L. unit precau-
tions.
OUT
1
Mounting & Adjustment

IN
SMC
Warning
1. Set the regulator while verifying the
displayed values of the inlet and outlet
A pressure gauges. Turning the regulator
knob excessively can cause damage to the
internal parts.
2. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator
knob as this may cause damage. It must
be operated manually.
r Caution
1. Be sure to unlock the knob before adjusting
IN OUT
Figure 1 the pressure and lock it after setting the
(Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure) pressure.
w Normal
Failure to follow this procedure can cause
damage to the knob and the outlet
q pressure may fluctuate.
e Inlet pressure Pressure in

(IN) diaphragm chamber
Figure 3
Orange mark
Figure 2
Back flow
IN OUT
• Pull the pressure regulator knob to unlock.
Inlet pressure Pressure in (You can visually verify this with the
(IN) diaphragm chamber "orange mark" that appears in the gap.)
• Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
When the knob is not easily locked, turn it
left and right a little and then push it (when
the knob is locked, the "orange mark", i.e.,
the gap will disappear).
2. A knob cover is available to prevent
careless operation of the knob. Refer to
When the inlet pressure (P1) is higher than the regulating pressure, the check valve w Features 1 for details.
closes and operates as a normal regulator (Figure 1).
When the inlet pressure (P1) is shut off and released, the check valve w opens and the
pressure in the diaphragm chamber q is released into the inlet side (Figure 2). Maintenance
This lowers the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q and the force generated by the
pressure regulator spring e lifts the diaphragm. Valve r opens through the stem, and Warning
the outlet pressure is released to the inlet side (Figure 3). 1. When using the regulator between a
solenoid valve and an actuator, check the
pressure gauge periodically.
Sudden pressure fluctuations may shorten
the durability of the pressure gauge. A
digital pressure gauge is recommended for
such situation or as deemed necessary.
44
AR20K to 60K
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7MPa
AR20K Rc 1/4 AR40K-06 Rc 3/8

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa

0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
AR25K Rc 3/8 AR50K Rc 1

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0
0 500 1000 1500 0 5000 10000
AR30K Rc 3/8 AR60K Rc 1

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0 5000 10000
0 500 1000 1500 0
AR40K Rc 1/2
0.6
0.5
Outlet pressure MPa
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
00
1000 2000 3000
Flow rate L/min (ANR)
45
Conditions:
Inlet pressure 0.7MPa
Outlet pressure 0.2MPa
Pressure Characteristics (Representative values) Flow rate 20L/min (ANR)
AR20K AR40K-06
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa

Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AR25K AR50K
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AR30K AR60K
0.25 0.25
Outlet pressure MPa
Outlet pressure MPa
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AR40K
0.25
Outlet pressure MPa
Set point
0.2
0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure MPa
46
AR20K to 60K
Construction
AR20K to 60K
A-A
A
OUT
1
IN
SMC
e t
IN OUT
r
q
Parts list
Material
No. Description Note
AR20K AR25K to 40K (-06) AR50K, 60K
1 Body Zinc die-cast Aluminum die-cast Platinum silver
2 Bonnet Polyacetal Aluminum die-cast Black
Replacement parts
Part no.
No. Description Material
AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Stainless steel
3 Valve assembly AR20P-090AS AR25P-090AS AR30P-090AS AR40P-090AS AR40P-090AS AR50P-090AS AR60P-090AS
Brass, HNBR
4 Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR20P-150AS AR25P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR50P-150AS AR50P-150AS
5 Valve guide assembly POM AR20P-050AS AR25P-050AS AR30P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR50P-050AS AR60P-050AS
6 Check valve assembly Note) — AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS
Note) Check valve construction includes a check valve cover and 2 screws.
47
Dimensions
AR20K to 40K Square embedded type

pressure gauge (option)
Port size Panel fitting dimension
A D U
C
IN OUT IN T OUT
V
S
Plate thickness
L
Pressure gauge
B
(option) AR20K to AR30K: Max. 3.5
AR40K: Max. 5
M
Pressure gauge
port size
Bracket
N (option)
Q
K F J
P E
AR50K, 60K Square embedded type

A pressure gauge (option) D
C
IN OUT
G
Pressure gauge
L
(option)
Pressure gauge
B
M
port size
N Port size Bracket

(option)
Q
K F J
P E
Accessory specification
Standard specification
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount
A B C D E F G J K L M N P Q S T U V
AR20K 1/8, 1/4 40 94 26.5 57 65 29.5 2 Note) 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 25 28.5 14 6
AR25K 1/4, 3/8 53 101 28 55 64 28.5 0 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 26 32.5 16 6
AR30K 1/4, 3/8 53 116 31 59 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7
AR40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 128 36 68 74 35 3.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7
AR40K-06 3/4 75 129 36 68 74 35 3 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7
AR50K 3/4, 1 90 169 43 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
AR60K 1 95 176 46 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
Note) For AR20K only, the position of the pressure gauge is above the center of the piping.
48
84
Duralife® Pressure Gauge
35-1009SW-L-02L-0/200 Type 1009, ASME B 40.1
Grade 1A (±1% of span)
DESIGNED FOR SAFETY AND • New PLUS!™ Performance Option:

LONGER LIFE - Liquid-filled performance in a dry
• 5-year limited warranty gauge
• Patented PowerFlex™ movement - Fights vibration and pulsations
isolates movement from shock and without liquid-fill headaches
vibration for longer life - Order as option XLL
• All stainless, all-welded construc-
tion for long life
OTHER FEATURES:
• ASME Grade 1A, 1% accuracy full
scale Available in 21⁄2˝ and 31⁄2˝ dial sizes,
• True Zero™ pointer indication –
Duralife® pressure gauges are liquid
no stop pin to mask false zero fillable and field convertible for panel
reading – ensures safety and mounting. Both zero and span adjust-
process control ments are standard.
The following Table is not for conversion purposes.
The gauge is available dry, liquid-
filled weatherproof or hermetically
STANDARD RANGES (3)(4)(5) sealed and now with PLUS!™ per-
Pressure formance option. A five year limited
psi kg/cm2 - bar kPa
warranty is standard with the Type
0/15 0/1 0/100
1009 Duralife® gauge.
0/30 0/1.6 0/160
0/60
0/2.5 0/250
0/100
0/4 0/400 BOURDON SYSTEM SELECTION(1)
0/160
0/200 0/6 0/600 Ordering Bourdon Tube Socket Tube Range Selection NPT
Code & Tip Material(1) Material Type Limits (psi) Conn.(6)
0/300 0/10 0/1000
0/400 AW 316 stainless steel Bronze C-Tube Vac/600 ⁄4
1
0/16 0/1600
0/600 AW 316 stainless steel Bronze Helical 1000 ⁄4
1
0/800 0/25 0/2500 SW 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel C-Tube Vac/600 ⁄4 & 1⁄2(2)
1
0/1000 0/40 0/4000 SW 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel Helical 800/15,000 ⁄4 & 1⁄2(2)
1
0/1500 0/60 0/6000

(1) For selection of the correct Bourdon system material, see the (4) Dual-scale dials will be supplied with standard metric inner
0/2000
0/100 0/10,000 media application table on page 253. scale and equivalent psi outer scale or with standard psi inner
0/3000 (2) 1⁄2 NPT available 31⁄2˝ lower SW system only. scale and equivalent metric outer scale–please specify.
0/4000 0/160 0/16,000 (3) Type 1009 gauges may be ordered with metric single-scale (5) Special logos and scales available upon request.
dial: kPa,bar or kg/cm2. (6) 1⁄4˝ JIS, BSP or DIN threads available on SW systems.
0/5000 0/250 0/25,000
0/6000 0/400 0/40,000
0/7500
0/600 0/60,000
0/10,000
0/15,000 0/1000 0/100,000
Vacuum
30 in./0 in.Hg –1/0 –100/0
Compound
30 in.Hg/15 psi –1/0/1.5 –100/0/150
30 in.Hg /30 psi –1/0/3 –100/0/300
30 in.Hg /60 psi –1/0/5 –100/0/500
30 in.Hg /100 psi –1/0/9 –100/0/900
30 in.Hg /150 psi –1/0/15 –100/0/1500 35-1009SW-L-02L-0/200
30 in.Hg /300 psi –1/0/24 –100/0/2400
TO ORDER THIS 1009 DURALIFE PRESSURE GAUGE: 0-200 psi

Select: 35 1009 SW (L) 02L XXX 1000#
1. Dial size–21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝
2. Case type–1009
3. Tube and socket material
4. Liquid filled (glycerin), leave blank if dry
5. Connection size–1⁄8 (01), 1⁄4 (02) 1⁄2 (04)
6. Connection location–Lower (L), Back (B)
7. Optional Features–see page 249
8. Standard pressure range–1000 psi
Accessories: see pages 243-248
Consult factory for guidance in product selection

Phone (203) 385-0217, Fax (203) 385-0602 or
visit our web site at www.ashcroft.com
Adjustable Angle Bimetal Thermometer
B836-05-05C- 2.5 in
B836-05-05C- 6 in
3" & 5" Dial The Trerice Adjustable Angle Bimetal
Sizes Thermometer can be configured to the
±1.0% most desirable viewing angle. This
Accuracy instrument has a hermetically sealed,
Stainless Steel stainless steel case designed to
Case & Stem withstand the rigors of industrial
External Reset environments, while producing an
accurate, responsive measurement.
Optional features are also available. Please

consult the Options Section for details.
______________________________________
For applications where the process media
may be corrosive or contained under pressure,
the use of a thermowell is required to prevent
damage to the thermometer and facilitate its
removal from the process. For correct
use and application of all bimetallic
thermometers, please refer to Bimetallic
Actuated Thermometer Standard ASME B40.3.
Bimetal Thermometers
B85606 pictured
Specifications
Models Coil Dialface Approximate Shipping
B83600, B85600 Bimetallic, silicone dampened on Aluminum, white background Weight
ranges to 300°F (148°C), above with black and blue graduations B83600: 1.1 lbs [0.5 kg]
Size 300°F not dampened and markings B85600: 1.5 lbs [0.68 kg]
B83600: 3"
B85600: 5" Connection External Reset
Adjustable angle, 1/2 NPT Yes
Case
300 stainless steel, hermetically Window Accuracy
sealed Double strength glass ±1.0% Full Scale ASME B40.3
Grade A
Stem Pointer
300 stainless steel, 1/4" diameter Balanced, black finished
How to Order
Sample Order Number B8560605
B856 06 05
Model Stem Length Range Code

B836 02 21/2"Stem See Standard
B856 04 4" Stem Available Ranges
06 6" Stem (over) B836-02-05C- 2.5 in
09 9" Stem
12 12" Stem
B836-05-05C- 6 in
15 15" Stem
18 18" Stem
24 24" Stem
Other: Specify Length in Inches

(72" maximum)
1/1/2001
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • 248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.trerice.com
37
Adjustable Angle Bimetal Thermometer
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
3.62 [92.1]
2.32 [58.9]
STEM
LENGTH
EXTERNAL
RESET
.64 [16.3]
1/2 NPT
Ø.25 [6.4]
(3” DIAL) 3.21 [81.4]

(5” DIAL) 5.21 [132.3]
.88 [22.4] HEX

Bimetal Thermometers
ADJUSTABLE
OVER
FULL 90° ARC
STEM MAY BE POSITIONED

IN ANY RADIAL LOCATION
AROUND THE DIAL
Standard Available Ranges

Dual Scale Ranges Fahrenheit Only Ranges Celsius Only Ranges Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01 –100° to 100°F & –75° to 40°C 01F –100° to 100°F 01C –75° to 40°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
02 –40° to 160°F & –40° to 70°C 02F –40° to 160°F 02C –40° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
03* 25° to 125°F & –5° to 50°C 03F* 25° to 125°F 03C* –5° to 50°C 10° 1° 5° 1/2°
04 0° to 200°F & –20° to 95°C 04F 0° to 200°F 04C –20° to 95°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
05 20° to 240°F & –10° to 115°C 05F 20° to 240°F 05C –10° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
27 0° to 250°F & –20° to 120°C 27F 0° to 250°F 27C –20° to 120°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
06 50° to 300°F & 10° to 150°C 06F 50° to 300°F 06C 10° to 150°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
07 50° to 400°F & 10° to 200°C 07F 50° to 400°F 07C 10° to 200°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
08 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 08F 50° to 500°F 08C 10° to 260°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
09* 150° to 750°F & 50° to 400°C 09F* 150° to 750°F 09C* 50° to 400°C 100° 10° 50° 5°
10* 200° to 1000°F & 100° to 550°C 10F* 200° to 1000°F 10C* 100° to 550°C 100° 10° 100° 5°
*Minimum stem length for these ranges is 4".
1/1/2001
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • 248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.trerice.com
38
Thermowells
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
for Bimetal Thermometers & Temperature Sensors
Threaded-Stepped Shank
Standard (21/2” – 6” )
(A)
STEM LENGTH
(P) Ø.260
EXTERNAL
THERMOWELLS
[7]
THREAD
1/2 NPSM
.40 Ø.44
U
[10] LENGTH [11]
.61
76-3JK
[15] 76-4J6
Standard (9 – 24” )
(A)
STEM LENGTH
Lengths
Ø.260
(P)
1/2 NPSM [7] Standard with Lagging Extension
EXTERNAL THREAD
(A) Stem Length U Length (T) U Length
21/2" 1.75 [44] – –
4" 2.50 [64] 0.60 [15] 1.90 [48]
6" 4.50 [114] 2.00 [51] 2.50 [64]
9" 7.50 [191] 3.00 [76] 4.50 [114]
Ø.50
.75 [13]
12" 10.50 [267] 3.00 [76] 7.50 [191]
1.00 U
[19] [25] LENGTH 15" 13.50 [343] 3.00 [76] 10.50 [267]
18" 16.50 [419] 3.00 [76] 13.50 [343]
24" 22.50 [572] 3.00 [76] 19.50 [495]
with Lagging Extension
(A) Pressure Rating (psi)
STEM LENGTH Operating Temperature
Ø.260
(P) [7] Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
1/2 NPSM EXTERNAL THREAD Carbon steel 5000 5000 4800 4600 3500 -
304 stainless steel 6550 6000 4860 4140 3510 3130
316 stainless steel 6540 6400 6000 5270 5180 4660
Monel 5530 4990 4660 4450 4450 -
Brass 3170 psi @ 150˚F, 2930 @ 350˚F
(T) U
.75 LAGGING 1.00 Ø.50
[19] LENGTH
EXTENSION [25] [13]
Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and
application, please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 76-4 J 6
Thermowell Style (P) External Thread (A) Stem Length (T) Lagging Extension Material
76- Bimetal/Sensor 3 1/2 NPT** D 21/2" Stem A 1" Extension (4" Stem only) 2 Brass
76-3JK Stepped shank* 4 3/4 NPT G 4" Stem C 2" Extension (6" Stem only) 3 Steel
76-4J6 5 1 NPT** J 6" Stem E 3" Extension (9" and longer Stem only) 4 Monel
M 9" Stem Omit if None 5 304SS
R 12" Stem 6 316SS
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem
* 21/2” - 6” stem straight shank.
** Not available with 21/2” stem length.
155
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
Thermowells
Heavy Duty • Tapered Shank for High Pressure Applications

Standard Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
(A)
THERMOWELLS
STEM LENGTH
Ø.260
1/2 NPSM (P) [7]
EXTERNAL THREAD
Ø.62
.75 1.00 U [16]
[19] [25] LENGTH
Lengths
Standard with Lagging Extension
(A) Stem Length U Length (T) U Length with Lagging Extension
4" 2.50 [64] 1.00 [25] 1.50 [38]
6" 4.50 [114] 2.00 [51] 2.50 [64]
(A)
9" 7.50 [191] 3.00 [76] 4.50 [114] STEM LENGTH
12" 10.50 [267] 3.00 [76] 7.50 [191]
15" 13.50 [343] 3.00 [76] 10.50 [267] (P) Ø.260
18" 16.50 [419] 3.00 [76] 13.50 [343] 1/2 NPSM EXTERNAL THREAD [7]
24" 22.50 [572] 3.00 [76] 19.50 [495]
Pressure Rating (psi)

Operating Temperature
Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
.75 [19]
Brass 5950 5750 5450 5250 4000 - (T) Ø.62
WRENCH
1.00 U
Carbon steel 7800 7050 6300 5360 4350 4100 ALLOWANCE LAGGING LENGTH [16]
EXTENSION
[25]
304 stainless steel 7800 7800 7250 7100 6000 5800
316 stainless steel 7170 6670 6040 5770 5770 -
Brass 4140 psi @ 150˚F, 3790 @ 350˚F
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 90-4 G 4
Thermowell Style (P) External Thread (A) Stem Length (T) Lagging Extension Material
90- Bimetal/Sensor 4 3/4NPT G 4" Stem C 2" Extension (6" Stem only) 2 Brass
Tapered Shank 5 1 NPT J 6" Stem E 3" Extension (9" and longer Stem only) 3 Steel
M 9" Stem Omit if None 4 Monel
R 12" Stem 5 304SS
V 15" Stem 6 316SS
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem
156
Thermowells
Socket-Weld Style • Stepped or Heavy Duty Tapered Shank
THERMOWELLS
Stepped Shank 1/2 NPSM (A) Ø.260
STEM LENGTH [7]
(P)
PIPE SIZE
U
LENGTH Ø.50
[13]
Tapered Shank
(A)
1/2 NPSM STEM LENGTH Ø.260
[7]
(P)
PIPE SIZE
Ø.63
U [16]
LENGTH
Lengths Pressure Rating (psi)

(A) Stem Length U Length Operating Temperature
4" 2.50 [64] Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
6" 4.50 [114] Stepped Carbon Steel 5200 5000 4800 4600 3500 -
Shank 304 Stainless Steel 6550 6000 4860 4140 3510 3130
9" 7.50 [191] Other Dimensions
12" 10.50 [267] Nominal Actual 316 Stainless Steel 6540 6400 6000 5270 5180 4660
15" 13.50 [343] Pipe Size (P) Diameter Tapered Carbon Steel 5950 5750 5450 5250 4000 -
Shank 304 Stainless Steel 7800 7050 6300 5360 4350 4100
18" 16.50 [419] 3/4" 1.050 [23.67]
24" 22.50 [572] 1" 1.315 [33.40] 316 Stainless Steel 7800 7800 7250 7100 6700 5800
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 90-S5 M 6
Thermowell Style (P) Nominal Pipe Size (A) Stem Length Material
76- Bimetal/Sensor S4 3/4" G 4" Stem 3 Steel
Stepped Shank S5 1" J 6" Stem 5 304SS
M 9" Stem 6 316SS
90- Bimetal/Sensor R 12" Stem
Tapered Shank V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem
157
Thermowells
Weld-In Style
THERMOWELLS
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters

Tapered Shank
(A)
1/2 NPSM STEM LENGTH
Ø.260
[7]
1.50
38]
Ø.63
[16]
U
LENGTH
Lengths Pressure Rating (psi) *

(A) Stem Length U Length Operating Temperature
4" 2.50 [64] Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
6" 4.50 [114] Carbon steel 5950 5750 5450 5250 4000 -
9" 7.50 [191] 304 stainless steel 7800 7050 6300 5360 4350 4100
316 stainless steel 7800 7800 7250 7100 6700 5800
12" 10.50 [267]
15" 13.50 [343] * Thermowell Pressure ratings for CRN differ from those shown above. Please
18" 16.50 [419] see CRN under Approvals in Technical Specifications of our website.
24" 22.50 [572]
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered. Improper
application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and application,
please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 90-W7 V 6
Thermowell Style Connection (A) Stem Length Material

90- Bimetal/Sensor W7 11/2" G 4" Stem 3 Steel
Tapered Shank J 6" Stem 5 304SS
M 9" Stem 6 316SS
R 12" Stem
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem
158
Thermowells
Flanged Style • Straight or Heavy Duty Tapered Shank
Straight Shank Tapered Shank
THERMOWELLS
(A)
(A)
STEM LENGTH
Ø.260 STEM LENGTH
FLANGE SIZE AND [7] FLANGE SIZE AND
RATING RATING
WELD AS REQUIRED
Ø.260
AS REQUIRED
WELD [7]
1/2 NPSM WELD
1/2 NPSM WELD
Ø.75 Ø.62
[19] [16]
U U
LENGTH LENGTH
Pressure Rating
Maximum pressure and temperature ratings are limited by the choice of
flange. Please see ANSI/ASME B16.5-2003 for more information.
Lengths
(A) Stem Length U Length
4" 2.00 [51]
6" 4.00 [102]
9" 7.00 [178]
12" 10.00 [254]
15" 13.00 [330]
18" 16.00 [406]
24" 22.00 [559]
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 78-81 J 6
Thermowell Type Flange Size and Rating (A) Stem Length Material
78- Bimetal/Sensor 51 1" G 4" Stem 3 Steel
Straight Shank 71 11/2" 150# RFF J 6" Stem 4 Monel
81 2" M 9" Stem 5 304SS
90- Bimetal/Sensor 181 3" R 12" Stem 6 316SS
Tapered Shank V 15" Stem
53 1" Wa 18" Stem
73 11/2" 300# RFF Wk 24" Stem
83 2"
183 3"
56 1"
76 11/2" 600# RFF
86 2"
186 3"
Other Flange Sizes and Ratings
available; consult factory.
159
Thermowells
Van Stone Style
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters..
Straight Shank
THERMOWELLS
(A)
STEM LENGTH
1/2 NPSM
Ø.260
[7]
(R)
RAISED (P)
FACE DIA. DIA.
Ø.75
[15]
U
LENGTH
Thermowell does not include

backing flange; when required,
a carbon steel backing flange
can be supplied. Consult factory.
Lengths Other Dimensions

(A) Stem Length U Length Nominal Actual Raised Face
Pipe Size (P) Diameter (R) Diameter
4" 2.00 [51]
1" 1.32 [33] 2.00 [51]
6" 4.00 [102]
11/2" 1.90 [48] 2.88 [73]
9" 7.00 [178]
12" 10.00 [254]
15" 13.00 [330]
Pressure Rating
18" 16.00 [406]
Maximum pressure and temperature ratings are limited by the choice of
24" 22.00 [559] flange. Please see ANSI/ASME B16.5-2003 for more information.
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 78-V7 R 6
Thermowell Style (P) Nominal Pipe Size (A) Stem Length Material
78- Bimetal/Sensor V5 1" G 4" Stem 3 Steel
Straight Shank V7 11/2" J 6" Stem 4 Monel
M 9" Stem 5 304SS
R 12" Stem 6 316SS
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem
160
Thermowells
Sanitary Style
Stepped
THERMOWELLS
1/2 NPSM (A)
STEM LENGTH
Ø.260
END CAP
WELD SIZE AS REQUIRED [7]
WELD
FINISH: 16-20 RA
ROUGHNESS AVERAGE 240 GRIT
Ø.50
[13]
U
LENGTH
Lengths
(A) Stem Length U Length Designed to meet 3A Dairy Certification
4" 2.50 [64] requirements.
6" 4.50 [114] Pressure ratings are dependent upon
9" 7.50 [191] the clamps, gaskets and ferrules used,
12" 10.50 [267] which are not supplied by Trerice.
15" 13.50 [343]
18" 16.50 [419]
24" 22.50 [572]
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 76-T8 M 6
Thermowell Type End Cap Size (A) Stem Length Material

76- Bimetal/Sensor T7 11/2" G 4" Stem 5 304SS
Stepped Shank T8 2" J 6" Stem 6 316SS
T18 3" M 9" Stem
R 12" Stem
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem
161
Section 7 V
Valves A
L
Control Valve V
- Cashco-
E
424-5107-5A1A000D
S
Relief Valve
- Kunkle -
6010GFEKM-0200
Ball Valve
- Sharpe-
49114R 2”
49116R 2”
49116R 3”
Needle Valve
- Marsh -
N1534 ½ In
N1334 ½ In
TECHNICAL BULLETIN 2266-TB
MODEL 2266
Pneumatic Control Valve
424-5107-5A1A000D
The Model 2266 is an inexpensive globe-style control

valve for plant utility and process applications. It
incorporates linear control characteristic for smooth
throttling action on pressure, temperature and liquid
level control. The TFE seat provides reliable shut-off
for on-off applications. Sizes are1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/2"
and 2" (DN15, 20, 25, 40 and 50).
FEATURES
• Quick change trim

• Linear or quick opening flow characteristics
• Metal seat or TFE soft seat
• Standard internal live-loaded V-ring packing.
• Stainless steel trim
• Full size or reduced orifice trim
• Field reversible fail safe action
APPLICATIONS
The Model 2266 is capable of handling air, gases,

water, steam and cryogenic fluids.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Metal & soft seat, and 2" (DN 40, 50) valves.
up to 400 psid (27.6
Sizes: Bronze on 1/2"–1-1/2" (DN15 – 40)
Bard). See Table 1.
body size (integral with bonnet).
Standard: -20 to 316 SST standard on 2" (DN50)
Body Rating: End Connections: Maximum Inlet +400°F (-29 to body
+204°C). Option-5: size; brass made from barstock on
Pressures: Pressure Drop: -325 to +150°F 2" (DN50) body size with trim MB4
(-198 to +66°C). and MB7.
Working Temperatures: See Table 5.
Phosphor bronze.
Bench Set/Instrument Pressures:
Nominal “SIG” Action Bench Set psig (Barg
psig (Barg)
ATO-FC 5–15
3–15 (.21-1.0)
3–13 (.21–.90)
5–15
ATO-FC
10–30
3–15 (.21–1.0) with P/P Posit.
3–13
ATC-FO
6–26
ATO-FC 10–30
6–30 (.41–2.1)
6–26 (.41–1.8)
Valve Action
ATO-FC
Fail Safe Action:
Seat Leakage:
The valves are
easily converted
Material: from fail close to fail Rangeability:
open.
Inherent Flow Characteristic:
Trims:
Body - Bronze –
ASTM B62 Bonnet Flow Coefficients:
-1/2"-1-1/2 sizes Meets ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class II with
Stem: ASTM B62 Bonnet - metal seat. Class VI with TFE soft
2" size ASTM B61 seat.
Standard 50:1
construction uses
Linear. The flow characteristic of the
Cage: trim S2 or S4. See
trim is produced by the machined
Table 4 for
contour of the seat ring, rather than
materials. The TFE
the plug. See Opt-90 for Quick
soft seat includes
Opening.
metal to metal
contact to prevent See Tables 2 and 3.
excessive
Guide Bushing: compression of the
1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/2" and 2" (DN15, 20, 25, 40 and TFE. FIGURE 11-1/2" (DN40) Model
50).
5/16" (7.9 mm) 2266 — Metal Seat, Fail Close
250# ANSI B16.15 for bronze bodies. diameter on 1/2"–1" Action
NPT female pipe thread. (DN15 – 20) valves.
3/8" (9.5 mm) BODY SUB-ASSEMBLY
Up to 400 psig (27.6 Barg).See Table 5. diameter on 1-1/2" SPECIFICATIONS
Std. internal (DN50) valves.
Packing: Packing Follower: Gaskets: Live-loaded TFE
V-Ring. Type 18-8 SST studs and nuts.
Brass.
Bonnet Bolting:
Seat ring –
Fluorogold (TFE
derivative) is
standard. Bonnet –
Packing Flange Bolting: TFE O-ring is
standard.
Screwed bonnet, no
bolts, on 1/2"
– 1-1/2" (DN15–40)
valves. GR. B7
FIGURE 2 studs and Gr. 2H
TFE Seating — Fail Open Action nuts standard on 2"
ACTUATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS
Action: Increasing loading pressure pushes Diaphragm: Neoprene with nylon insert. stem down.
Diaphragm Case Cast iron (ASTM A126) on Actuator: Model
27 used on 3/4", 1" and 1-1/2" and Yoke: 1/2"–1-1/2" (DN 15–40) valves.
(DN20, 25, and 40) valves. Cast iron yoke and steel diaphragm Model 50 used on 2" (DN50) cases on
2" (DN50) valves. valves.
Painting: Standard: All non-corrosion
re-Working Temp: -20 to +180°F (-28 to +83°C.) sistant portions to be painted with corrosion
resistant epoxy paint per Clearance 12 cu. in. on Model 27 actuator. Cashco Spec #S-1606.
Volume: 28 cu. in. on Model 50 actuator. Alternate: See Opt-95.
Volumetric 9.3 cu. in. on Model 27 actuator.

Displacement: 36 cu. in. on Model 50 actuator.
OPTION SPECIFICATIONS
Option-5: CRYOGENIC CONSTRUCTION. Option -90: QUICK OPENING CHARACTER-For cryogenic service on
oxygen ISTIC. Alternate trim characteristic. and other fluids. Includes SST col-Quick opening is available
on 3/4", 1" umn, special TFE bonnet and seat and 1-1/2" (DN20, 25 and 40) valves.
ring gaskets, and Live Loaded TFE METAL SEAT ONLY. See Table 3 packing. Available in TFE seats (S7,
for Cv’s. MB7) or metal seat (S6). A 5" (127 mm) extension column is used with Option-95: EPOxY
PAINT. Special epoxy paint1/2" – 1-1/2" (DN15 – 40) valves on ing of all non-corrosion resistant gaseous
service. A 12" (305 mm) external surfaces per Cashco Spec extension column is used on 1/2" #S-1547.
Utilized in harsh atmo
– 1" (DN15 – 25) valves on liquid spheric conditions. service. A 15" (381 mm) extension column can be used
on 1-1/2" (DN25) valves on liquid service; it can also be used on 2" (DN50) valves for both liquid and gaseous
service. Cleaned
and packaged for oxygen service per Cashco cleaning specification
#S-1134. Applicable temperature range -325° to 150°F (-195° to 66°C).
Option-12: REDUCED ORIFICE. For reducing the maximum flow

rate, or for handling higher pressure drops than the
standard orifice will handle. Not available with Option
-90, quick opening
trim.
Option -15: STELLITED TRIM. Stellite is applied to 316 SST seat ring and
plug, metal to metal seats.
Option -55: SPECIAL CLEANING. Cleaned per Cashco Specification

#S-1134.
With properly selected materials, cleanliness level
suitable for oxygen service.
FIGURE 3
1-1/2" Model 2266-5 — Fail Close Action
2266-TB
ACCESSORY SPECIFICATIONS
764P or 764PD Pressure controller for controlling Solenoid Valve: Standard Brass: Available in
stan-Pressure pressure between vacuum and dard weatherproof model or explo-Controller: 2500 psig.
The 764PD variation is sion-proof model. Brass body, 1/4" for differential pressure applications (DN8)
female NPT connections. between 1 and 100 psid (.07 and 6.9 Nipple mounted to actuator casing. Barg).
Unit is nipple mounted on the 120 VAC, 60 Hz power supply. actuator. When a positioner is used, Gen.
Purpose: ASCO #8320G176. the 764P is bracket mounted. x-Proof: ASCO #EF8320G176.
r: 1/2" – 1-1/2" (DN 15–40) VALVES - Alternate SST: Similar to standard Top Mounted: brass unit, exceptwith 303 SST body. Moore
Products pneumatic position-Gen. Purpose: ASCO #8320G201. er, Model 73N12F is top mounted x-Proof: ASCO
#EF8320G201. on 1/2"–1-1/2" (DN15–40) valves. 3-15 (.21-1.03 Barg), 3-9 (.21-.62 Standard installation vents actuator
Barg) or 9-15 (.62-1.03 Barg) psig and drives valve to fail-safe position instrument signal, direct or reverse upon loss of
electrical power. action. Position 1/2" – 1-1/2" (DN15–40) VALVES -
2" (DN50) VALVES - Yoke Mounted:
Indicating One or two Proximity probe-type mag-
General. All feedback linkage ex-
Switch: netic switches Go Systems “Series
posed to elements of SST materials.
70”. Contains one SPDT switch, two
Aluminum housing with corrosion re-
amps @ 240 VAC, 50 ma @ 24 VDC.
sistant polyurethane paint. Standard
with 2-gauge cluster. Pneumatic
Standard–Explosion Proof. For “haz
output load as required by actua Nominal “SIG” Action Bench Set psig (Barg)
ardous locations”; Class 1, Division
psig (Barg)
tor bench range. Adjustable zero,
1, Groups A, B, C and D. (UL listed.) ATO-FC 5–15
3–15 (.21-1.0)
3–13 (.21–.90)
stroke, gain and damping settings.
Field reversible action. Dedicated airset recommended. P/P Pneumatic. Model 9540L. Accepts 3-15
psig (0.2-1.0 Barg) or
2-way split ranges 3-9 or 9-15 psig
(0.2-0.6 or 0.6-1.0 Barg) input sig-
* The “upper” switch is NOT available when a top mounted handwheel or nals.
Plastic cover with see-through P/P positioner is supplied
panel to view internal gauges.
2" (DN50) VALVES -One or two I/P
Electro-Pneumatic. Model 9520L.
yoke mounted rotary trip switch(s);
Accepts 4-20 mA or 2-way split rang-
contains 1-SPDT switch. Switch rates
4-12 or 12-20 mA input signals.
ing is 15A @ 125, 250 or 480 VAC.
NEMA 3 enclosure, intrinsically safe.
UL rating L96. Up to two switch units
FM approved. Gauges mounted on
may be mounted per valve.
AR. Air Tubing: Standard instrument air tubing and NEMA 4 enclosure. fittings are Imperial-Eastman “Im-
Explosion Proof. Microswitch polene”

thermoplastic tubing with
#Ex-AR. For “hazardous locations”; brass
fittings.
NEMA 7, Class 1, Groups C & D; NEMA

9, Class II, Groups E, F and G.
Model 5200P is bracket mounted to
the diaphragm case. 1/4" (DN8) NPT
Air Supply Regulator: Top Mounted Overrides the actuator spring force inlet and outlets. A 1-1/2"
(38.1 mm) Handwheel
to stroke the valve. Iron handwheel,

diameter supply pressure gauge is Assembly: stainless steel handwheel screw,
included.
bronze bonnet and Buna-N O-ring stem
seal. Not available on 1/2" thru 1-1/2"
(DN15 thru 40) body sizes
when a P/P positioner or an “upper”
position indicating switch is supplied.
2266-TB
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE 1
“Air Supply” psig
Nominal “SIG” Action Bench Set psig (Barg)
(Barg)
(Barg
psig (Barg) psig (Barg) psig
)
ATO-FC 5–15 (.34–1.0)
3–15 (.21-1.0) 20 (1.4)
3–13 (.21–.90)
5–15 (.34–1.0) 20 (1.4)
ATO-FC
10–30 (.69–2.1) 35 (2.4)
3–15 (.21–1.0) with P/P Posit.
3–13 (.21–.90) 20 (1.4)
ATC-FO
6–26 (.41–1.8) 35 (2.4)
ATO-FC 10–30 (.69–2.1)
6–30 (.41–2.1) 35 (2.4)
6–26 (.41–1.8)
MAxIMUM PRESSURE DROP METAL OR TFE SEAT
TABLE 2
FLOW
(Barg)
(Barg
)
ATO-FC 5–15 (.34–1.0)
3–15 (.21-1.0) 20 (1.4)
3–13 (.21–.90)
5–15 (.34–1.0) 20 (1.4)
ATO-FC
10–30 (.69–2.1) 35 (2.4)
3–15 (.21–1.0) with P/P Posit.
3–13 (.21–.90) 20 (1.4)
ATC-FO
6–26 (.41–1.8) 35 (2.4)
ATO-FC 10–30 (.69–2.1)
6–30 (.41–2.1) 35 (2.4)
6–26 (.41–1.8)
Valve Action
COEFFICIENTS LINEAR CHARACTERISTIC – CV @ 10% TRAVEL INCREMENTS METAL OR COMPOSITION SOFT SEAT DESIGN
Flow-to-Open F L Factor = 0.90
TABLE 3 FLOW
(Barg)
(Barg
)
ATO-FC 5–15 (.34–1.0)
3–15 (.21-1.0) 20 (1.4)
3–13 (.21–.90)
COEFFICIENTS QUICK OPENING CHARACTERISTIC – CV @ 10% TRAVEL INCREMENTS METAL SEAT DESIGN ONLY
Flow-to-Open F L Factor = 0.90

(Barg)
(Barg
)
ATO-FC 5–15 (.34–1.0)
3–15 (.21-1.0) 20 (1.4)
3–13 (.21–.90)
5–15 (.34–1.0) 20 (1.4)
ATO-FC
10–30 (.69–2.1) 35 (2.4)
3–15 (.21–1.0) with P/P Posit.
3–13 (.21–.90) 20 (1.4)
ATC-FO
6–26 (.41–1.8) 35 (2.4)
ATO-FC 10–30 (.69–2.1)
6–30 (.41–2.1) 35 (2.4)
6–26 (.41–1.8)
Valve Action
ATO FC
METRIC CONVERSION FACTOR: Cv / 1.16 = kv TABLE 4
TRIM MATERIAL COMBINATIONS
2266-TB
TABLE 5 “Ai
MAxIMUM INLET
PRESSURE psig (Barg) psig (Barg) p
ATO-FC 5–15 (.34–1.0)
3–15 (.21-1.0)
3–13 (.21–.90)
5 15 ( 34 1 0)
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
1/2" – 1-1/2" (DN15 – 40) Size 2" (DN50) Size with Model 50 Actuator
with Model 27 Actuator
English Units – In. & lbs.

1
For Opt-5 Cryogenic Construction, add 5 lbs.
Metric Units – mm & kg
1
For Opt-5 Cryogenic Construction, add 2.3 kgs.
2
2
6
6
-
T
B
“Air Su
(B
ATO-FC 5–15 (.34–1.0)
3–15 (.21-1.0) 20
3–13 (.21–.90)
5–15 (.34–1.0) 20
ATO-FC
10–30 (.69–2.1) 35
3–15 (.21–1.0) with P/P Posit.
3–13 ( 21– 90) 20
“Air
psig (Barg) psig (Barg) ps

ATO-FC 5–15 (.34–1.0)
3–15 (.21-1.0) 2
3–13 (.21–.90)
5–15 (.34–1.0) 2
ATO-FC
10–30 (.69–2.1) 35
3–15 (.21–1.0) with P/P Posit.
3 13 ( 21 90) 2
424-5107-5A1A000D
4 5 10 7 5 A 1 A 0 0 0
MODEL 2266 PRODUCT CODE 02/12/09

䘀䤀䜀唀刀䔀........... ....................................
49114R 2 "
49116R 2 "
49116R 3 "
SERIES 49
VALVE PAR TS AND IDENTIFICATION
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
CLASS 150 Wall Thickness ASME B16.34
BLOW OUT PROOF STEM Face to Face Dimensions ASME B16.10
LOCKING DEVICE Flange Dimensions ASME B16.5
Pressure Tests ASME B16.34 API 598 (Optional)
Basic Design ASME B16.34
15
13
11B
11C
1/2” - 2” 14
13B
11A
2-1/2” - 6”
11 13A
10 11B
19
7 9 13
12
17 8
11A
2 6
11
18
10
7
19 9
8
1 16 6
4
3 16A
4 18
5
1
4 16A
3
4
5
2
PART
NO. PART QTY. MATERIAL
1 Body 1 Carbon Steel ASTM A216 WCB
316 Stainless Steel ASTM A351 CF8M
PART
2 End Connector 4 Carbon Steel ASTM A216 WCB
NO. PART QTY. MATERIAL
316 Stainless Steel ASTM A351 CF8M
13 Handle 1 304 Stainless Steel (1/2” - 2”)
3 Ball 1 316 Stainless Steel
Galvanized Steel (2-1/2” - 6”)
4 Seat 2 Reinforced PTFE
13A Wrench Block 1 304 Stainless Steel (2-1/2” - 6”)
5 Body Seal 1 PTFE
13B Handle Bolt 1 304 Stainless Steel (2-1/2” - 6”)
6 Stem 1 316 Stainless Steel
14 Locking Device 1 304 Stainless Steel
7 Thrust Bearing 1 316 Stainless Steel (1/2” - 2”)
8 Stem Packing 15 Sleeve 1 PVC

(1/2” - 2”) 2 PTFE
16 Body Stud A193 ASTM A193, Gr. B8M (Stainless Steel)
(2-1/2” - 6”) 3 PTFE 4
(1/2” - 1”) A193 ASTM A193, Gr. B7 (Carbon Steel)
9 Gland Packing 1 304 Stainless Steel
16A Body Bolt A193 ASTM A193, Gr. B8M (Stainless Steel)
4/6/8
10 Belleville Washer 2 304 Stainless Steel (1-1/2” - 6”) A193 ASTM A193, Gr. B7 (Carbon Steel)
11 Packing Nut 1 304 Stainless Steel 17 Nut A194 ASTM A194, Gr. B8M (Stainless Steel)
4
(1/2” - 1”) A194 ASTM A194, Gr. B7 (Carbon Steel)
11A Lock Tab 1 Stainless Steel
18 Anti Static Device 2 316 Stainless Steel
11B Nut 1 304 Stainless Steel
19 Stop Pin
11C Nut Washer 1 304 Stainless Steel
(1/2”-2”) 1 304 Stainless Steel
12 Stopper 1 304 Stainless Steel (2-1/2” - 6”) 2 304 Stainless Steel
SERIES 49
VALVE PARTS AND IDENTIFICATION
B
B
1/2” -2” Handle

2-1/2” - 6” Pipe Handle
E F
N
D
0.06
CV DATA PORT WEIGHT (lbs.)

1/2” 26 1/2” 0.59 1/2” 3.50
3/4” 50 3/4” 0.78 3/4” 4.50
1” 94 1” 1.00 1” 6.50
1-1/2” 260 1-1/2” 1.50 1-1/2” 12.00
2” 480 2” 2.00 2” 18.00
2-1/2” 750 2-1/2” 2.55 2-1/2” 29.00
3” 1300 3” 3.00 3” 36.00
4” 2300 4” 4.00 4” 54.00
6” 5400 6” 6.00 6” 115.00
CV-The volume of water in Gal./Min. that pass through a given valve with a pressure drop of 1 PSI.
DIMENSION TABLE
SIZE A B C D E F N
1/2” 4.25 4.65 3.00 2.13 2.38 3.50 4
3/4” 4.62 4.65 3.35 2.32 2.75 3.85 4
1” 5.00 6.18 3.75 2.50 3.13 4.25 4
1-1/2” 6.50 9.13 4.50 3.25 3.56 5.00 4
2” 7.00 9.13 4.80 3.50 4.75 6.00 4
2-1/2” 7.50 13.13 6.70 3.74 5.50 7.00 4
3” 8.00 13.12 7.00 4.00 6.00 7.48 4
4” 9.00 13.12 7.70 4.51 7.50 9.01 8
6” 15.50 25.50 9.45 7.76 9.50 10.98 8
Choose from our full line of high quality
valves and actuators to meet your needs.
SEAT PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE RATING SERIES 49

400
RTFE
300 CS-WCB
Pressure (PSIG)
CLASS 150
SST-CF8M
200
100
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Maximum Temperature °F
HOW TO ORDER
VA LVE VA LVE
SIZE SERIES CLASS ALLOY SEATS
1/2” 49 150# = 11 4 = Carbon Steel R = RTFE

3/4” 6 = Stainless Steel
1”
1-1/4”
1-1/2”
2”
2-1/2”
3”
4”
6”
49114R 2 "
49116R 2 "
49116R 3 "
3/4” 49 11 6 R
Toll Free: 1-877-7SHARPE

(877) 774-2773
Fax: (708) 562-9250
Email: info@sharpevalves.com
www.sharpevalves.com
A Division of Smith-Cooper International, LLC 1260 Garnet Drive
Northlake, Illinois 60164 U.S.A.
Due to continuous development of our product range we reserve the right to change the dimensions and information contained in the leaflet as required. Rev. 1/09
N1534 1/2 IN CS
N1334 1/2 IN SS
Section 8 A
Acessories C
E
Air Receiver S
- Silvan Tanks-
S
TNK-27-54-760.4-200
760gal O
R
RoboDrain
I
- Air System Products-
ACCOM-RD11-T E
S
About Us
We accept the following
forms of payment:
Need a standard air receiver fast? We have most all advertised sizes in stock and ready to ship!
Over 95% of all stock air receiver orders ship within 24 hours.
Need Help? Get A Free e-Quote.
(800) AIR-TANK
(800-247-8265)
Click on an air receiver style to view available sizes and drawings:
TNK-27-54-760.4-200
SILVAN TANKS -
Horizontal and Vertical Tanks from 7,500

Vertical Tanks from 12 to 5,000 Gallons Horizontal Tanks from 12 to 1550 Gallons to 30,000 Gallons - Built To Order
Silvan Industries, Inc. is recognized as one of the leading domestic manufacturers of ASME air receivers. Silvan stocks designs from
12 to 5000 gallon capacity and can ship these products typically within 24 hours. We can also build to order designs up to 30,000
gallons. We thank you for taking the time to learn more about our standard air receivers. Should you place an order, you can expect
to receive world-class customer service, competitive pricing, and a high-quality product. If one of our standard designs will not meet
your application, please call us to discuss your needs. Over 75% of the products we sell are custom designed vessels so we can most
assuredly custom design and fabricate a product specifically for your application.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Approvals
Silvan Air Receivers are designed and constructed in accordance with the current edition of the Unfired Pressure Vessels Section VIII
Div. 1 of the ASME Code and are subsequently registered with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessels Inspectors. Upon
special request, Silvan is prepared to comply with the requirements of the American Bureau of Shipping, the US Coast Guard, DOT,
CE Mark, the Canadian Department of Labour, or other internationally recognized approval bodies.
Modifications
Occasionally customers require limited modifications (such as changing the size of a threaded opening) to the stock air receiver
tanks presented in this price list. Silvan will quote special prices for these modifications. The quotes will include a minimum charge of
$140 per tank to cover the cost of hydrostatic testing and other special handling and processing which is required in the modification
of a stock tank.
Drawings of any of Silvan's Standard Air Receivers listed here are available as a .pdf from this website (Click here for HORIZONTAL,
VERTICAL and MEGA RECEIVER drawings. Silvan will be happy to develop and quote special designs for large quantity users.
Platforms
Tank platforms are furnished with NEMA motor frame slotting for the mounting of motors. Upon request, we will provide platforms
without slotting for an additional fee.
Terms and Conditions
All prices are quoted F.O.B. Marinette, Wisconsin. Prices are subject to change without notice. Different sizes and types of stock
tanks ordered for shipment at one time may be grouped for purposes of quantity pricing. Terms are % 10 days, 30 days net. Subject
to credit approval.
Silvan Industries, Inc.
Copyright © 2007. All rights reserved.
93 APPROX LOA
81 REF TANK LOA 12
15 11/16 49 5/8 15 11/16

±3/16 ±3/16
74 1/4 4-1
±3/16 3/16 5-1
41 5/8 4-1
5-1
24 1/4 75~
TYP ITEM 7
4-1
35 11/16 7 3-1
±3/16 5-1
BACK
7 0
SIDE 2 7
9
BOTH ENDS
4" X 6" SLOT APPROX SEAM

4 REQ'D 8 LOACATION ITEM 4
9
45° 90°
10 3/4" X 1" SLOT

4 PLACES 45°
14 EQUALLY SPACED 30°
8
ON A 42" DIA B.C.
54 DIA
8 15°
6
4-1
6
5-1
3/16 1 7/16" DIA
TYP ITEM 8 4-1
5-1
4-1 3 5/8" DIA 3/4" DIA 4-HOLES
1/4
5-1 TYP ITEM 6 EQUALLY SPACED
4 3/8
BURN TO SUIT ON A 6" DIA B.C.
4
TYP ITEM 6
3 4
7
4-1 1
3-1
7 5 12
5-1
5
TYP 82.5~ 6 1
4-1
1/4 6 1/2-14 3/4 5-1
6 30°
BACK SIDE
BACK SIDE
1. SHELL .375 NOM SA455 P.V.Q. 7/8" OFFSET ON SHELL
DES. THK. .359 E= 70% BOTH ENDS 10 1 60-140 DATA PLATE ASME CARBON STEEL
HEADS .375 NOM SA516 GR 70 P.V.Q. INSPECTIN NOTE: 9 1 46-1408 FLG PILOT 1/2 NPT SA181-70
DES. THK. .314 S= 85% JOGGLE STAKE WELD PORTION
8 2 46-1410 FLG PILOT 1 NPT SA181-70
OF SHELL MUST BE DYE
2. WORKING PRESSURE 200 PSI PENETRANT INSPECTED 7 2 46-1413 FLG PILOT 2 NPT SA181-70
3. TEST PRESSURE HYDRO 260 PSI 4-1 6 2 46-5250 FLG 3 150# RFSO & PIPE ASSY
4. TEMPERATURE MIN. -20 °F MAX 400 °F 5-1
4-CORNERS 5 1 46-9163 MANWAY 12 X 16 X 3/4 X 4 300#SA106 GR C
5. ALL WELDED FITTINGS MUST BE HELD 4 1 12-909 BASE RING FOR 48", 54" & 60" DIA TANK
PERPENDICULAR TO CENTERLINE 3 1 135-218-3 HEAD - ELL. 54" DIA. (910-653)
WITHIN 3/8" IN 12" 2 1 135-218-2 HEAD - ELL. 54" DIA. (910-653)
6. IMPACT TEST EXEMPT PER PAR.UG-20(F) 1 1 36-7540 SHELL .375 X 51 3/8 X 168 15/32
7. SPECIFICATIONS: ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
CALCULATED WEIGHT: 1845 LB UNLESS OTHERWISE TITLE
CALCULATED CAPACITY: 688 GALLONS SPECIFIED INCH
TOLERANCES 27-54-700-200 ASME AIR
8. CRN- NONE .X..................±.1
ILVAN INDUSTRIES INC
9. N.D.T.- PT .XX..................±.02 RECEIVER MARINETTE, WISCONSIN
.XXX..................±.005
10. FINISH- SEE 135-218 FINISH SPEC FRACTIONS.....±1/16 CUSTOMER DRAWN CHECKED DRAWING NO REV
ANGLE..........±1°
(BUILT IN ACCORDANCE WITH LATEST EDITION OF SECTION VIII DIV 1 ASME CODE) FINISH............250
GLAUBER EQUIPMENT TNT GLP
THIS DRAWING & SPECIFCATIONS ARE PROPERTY OF SILVAN IND. INC. AND MAY NOT CUST DWG NO TYPE 6/4/2009 6/25/2009 135-218 A
BE COPIED, REPRODUCED, OR USED IN WHOLE OR PART, AS A BASIS FOR DESIGN A ISSUED
MANUFACTURE OR SALE WITHOUT PRIOR PERMISSION FROM SILVAN IND. INC. NONE ASME
REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE THIRD ANGLE PROJ SIZE: B SHEET 1 OF 1
ROBO S DRAIN
Pneumatically Powered
Condensate Removal System
ACCOM-RD11-T
ROBO DRAIN
Patents Pending
Features....
S See-Through Vessel S Ball Valve Stem Support System
S Fully Pneumatic S Ideal for Oil/Water Separators
S No Wasted Air S Non-Clogging Ball Valve
S Low Profile S No Strainers to Clean
S Made in U.S.A. S Operates On Demand
AIR SYSTEM PRODUCTS, INC.

51 Beach Ave. Lancaster, NY 14086 (716)683-0435 FAX (716) 683-7128
"The Best in Condensate Drain Technology"
Bulletin RD401
DESIGN OPERATION
The ROBO DRAIN is the ultimate demand operated drain. Condensation enters through one of two ports. The see-
The unit is fully automatic, no electricity is required. Its low through vessel allows visual inspection of the condensa-
profile gives you the advantage of installing it in areas tion as it rises. A stainless steel float rises with the level
where the vessel to be drained is only a few inches from the of condensation and positions a magnetic force over the
ground. The ROBO DRAIN's design also eliminates the valve housing. When the liquid level reaches the desired
need for the installation of a vent line for most applications. level, the magnet in the valve housing snaps upward and
A unique air valve design uses a magnetic force to ensure allows air to pass through a stainless steel seat. The air
both a positive opening and closing that will prevent any air then moves to a non-lubricated air cylinder causing it to
loss. The magnetic force is cleverly positioned away from extend and open the ball valve. Condensation, scale and
the condensation level to prevent any attraction of metal rust particles rapidly exit the unit. Before any air is lost,
particulate. An innovative ball valve support and position- the float removes the magnetic force from the valve and
ing system prevents the side-loading problem which other- the seat is covered with a Viton seal. A powerful spring
wise would cause premature sealing failure around the returns the air cylinder to its normal position and rotates
valve stem. Rifle drilled discharge porting ensures that the positive closing ball valve back to its normally closed
scale and rust will exit through a full ported 1/2" ball valve. position. The pilot air used to actuate the air cylinder is
The ROBO DRAIN will not clog ---- no strainer required. isolated from the air in the drain's reservoir.
SPECIFICATIONS MATERIALS
Inlets: (2) 3/4" NPT Reservoir: Aluminum and Composite
Outlet: 1/2" NPT Valve: Bronze w/SS. Ball and Stem
Power: Clean, Dry Compressed Air 80 to 130 PSI Float: Stainless Steel
Pressure: 0 to 250 PSI Seat: Stainless Steel
Operating Temperature: 32° to 180° F. Seal: Viton
Weight: 16 lbs.
Discharge: 24 Ounces per cycle. OPTIONS - Consult factory
All design specifications are subject to change without notice.
Distributed by:
AIR SYSTEM PRODUCTS, INC.
51 Beach Ave., Lancaster, NY 14086
(716)683-0435 n (716)683-7128
www.airsyspro.com
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
FOR ROBO DRAIN
The ROBO DRAIN is designed for trouble-free and The ROBO DRAIN is supplied with an inlet filter, which should be
maintenance- free draining of unwanted accumulations of installed in the ROBO DRAIN head (See Dwg 2 on back). The use
condensation and other foreign matter from any collection of unfiltered air can cause the drain to fail.
point in a compressed air system without the need for
electricity. Once the drain is installed, close the By-Pass drain valve and open
the Shut-Off valve. The pressure vessel can now be repressurized.
INSTALLATION
CHECKING THE DRAIN'S OPERATION
CAUTION: COMPRESSED AIR CAN BE DANGEROUS.
After installation is complete and the drain is on line, a check should
Before attempting to install the drain, be certain that the
be made that the condensation is properly entering the reservoir.
pressure vessel on which the drain will be installed is
This can easily be done by looking through the translucent reservoir.
completely depressurized.
If condensation is not entering the reservoir, check for the following:
The drain should not be installed in areas that are exposed to
freezing temperatures (heater option is available). Be certain
1. Make sure the auxiliary shut-off valve is open.
the air system pressure does not exceed the 250 PSI working
2. Do not use the bottom inlet on the ROBO DRAIN without
pressure of the drain and the pressure to the control system
installing a vent line.
does not exceed 120 psi. The inlet temperature should not
3. If a vent line is installed, make sure it is down stream
exceed 180 degrees F.
from the vessel that is being drained.
4. Be certain that the ROBO DRAIN reservoir is not higher than
Connecting the drain to the air system should be done by using
the vessel that is being drained. This is very important
one of the recommended installation diagrams shown herein.
when using the top inlet on the ROBO DRAIN reservoir.
The installation of a strainer is not required or recommended.
5. Check to make sure the vessel being drained has
condensation in it.
Install the drain as close to the source to be drained as possible.
Since the ROBO DRAIN uses gravity to fill the reservoir, the
If the top inlet is being used and no condensation is entering the
entire drain must be installed below the vessel to be drained
ROBO DRAIN reservoir, and all the above items have been
when using the top inlet. If flexible tubing is used on the
checked, we recommend that the bottom inlet be used with a vent
discharge, be certain it is properly fastened to prevent it from
line out of the top.
whipping when the drain discharges the condensation.
If condensate fills the reservoir and the drain does not operate,
The ROBO DRAIN will accept condensation from either the check to see if control line air is supplied to control line port. If the
top or the bottom of the reservoir. We recommend the use drain is supplied with an optional test button, the supply of control
of the top entry port. If the bottom inlet is used, then a vent line line air can be checked by pushing the test button. If the unit does
must be used. The vent line should be installed down stream
not operate, then no air is being supplied or the inlet filter is plugged.
from the vessel that is being drained. This will insure that the
air in the reservoir will properly exit as the condensation fills
the tank and replaces the air. Install the vent line in the 1/8" OPTIONS
port located on the side of drain. The other end of the vent line
should be run back to the air system to a point just down l Cycle Counter l Manual Override Test Button.
stream from the source that is being drained. Use non-
l High Level Alarm. l Heater.
galling pipe sealant on all joints. The use of shut-off valves,
unions and bypass valves is recommended. A backup wrench
should be used on the discharge ball valve to prevent it from WARRANTY
turning and causing the linkage to bind.
The ROBO DRAIN is warranted to be free from defects in
The inlet port that is not used must be plugged by using a workmanship and materials for a period of one year from the date
standard 3/4" npt plug. When using the top inlet, any reduction of shipment. The liability of the manufacturer is limited to repair or
in the 3/4"pipe size is not recommended and the ROBO DRAIN replacement of the drain at its option. In no event shall the
reservoir cannot be higher than the bottom of the vessel that is manufacturer be liable for special or consequential damages or for
being drained. It is best to run the drain in a downward pitch from delay in performances of this warranty.
the bottom of the vessel being drained to the ROBO DRAIN inlet
CAUTION: Any attempt to repair the drain without authorization will
The power to operate the ROBO DRAIN comes from void any warranty.
compressed air. ONLY CLEAN DRY AIR SHOULD BE USED.
The supply pressure should be between 80 and 120 psig.
INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS ON REVERSE SIDE
Manufactured by :
AIR SYSTEM PRODUCTS, INC. l P. O. Box 10 Lancaster, N. Y. USA l Phone 716-683-0435
RD699
IN GENERAL
In order for the condensate to properly enter the Robo Drain reservoir, the Dwg. 1
condensate line to the Robo Drain must always be installed below the bottom
of the vessel to be drained. It is equally important to provide a means for the
air that is contained in the reservoir to escape (vent) as the condensate
enters the reservoir. If the air can not escape, the condensate will not enter
the reservoir. Below are suggestions on how to best install the Robo Drain
on typical types of vessels that have to drained of condensate. However, it
is possible to install the Robo Drain without a balance line (Dwg. not shown),
providing the condensate enters the top inlet and the flow rates are less than
9 GPH (750 cfm for an aftercooler or 1500 cfm drier) for a 1/2" drain line and
19 GPH (1500 cfm for an aftercooler or 3000 cfm drier) for a 3/4" line. The
use of unions and shut-off valves are recommended for both the condensate
line and the balance line.
RECEIVER TANK
The preferred installation for a Robo Drain on a receiver tank is having

the condensate enter the top inlet port and having the balance line go
back to the tank at a position that is above the level of the condensate
(Dwg. 1).
FILTER and AFTERCOOLER MOISTURE SEPARATOR
If a cyclone separator or filter has pipe plugs located in the top of the Dwg. 2
head, the plug closest to the discharge pipe should be removed and the
balance line should be installed (Dwg. 2). If there is no provision on the
cyclone separator or filter for a balance line, install it in the discharge
side of the pipe line and as close to the cyclone separator as possible.
REFRIGERATED DRYER
If a balance line is required, it must be connected to the port located on top of

the separator that is closest to the discharge side (Dwg. 2), or between the
Vent Line Control Line
separator and the air-to-air heat exchanger. If a port is not available as Inlet Filter
described above, then venting to atmosphere is recommended. When venting
to atmosphere, the condensate should enter through the bottom entry port on
the drain. The bleed or needle valve is installed on the 1/8" NPT vent port and
allows the air in the Robo Drain reservoir to escape to the atmosphere (Dwg Needle Valve
3). The bleed valve (not included) should be adjusted so that only 3 to 5 (Not Supplied)
bubbles per second are visible. We do not recommend installing a vent line
down stream from the dryer. The vent line can be a conduit for transferring
moisture from the drain to the previously dried air. This can result in unwanted
Discharge
moisture being sent down stream.
Port 1/2" npt
INTERCOOLERS
Install the condensate drain line into the upper port only. This will prevent
the possibility of condensate being drawn back into the intercooler on
some systems. It is important that the vent line be installed on the same Dwg. 3
stage that is being drained or to atmosphere.
BALANCE LINE
As mentioned above, both the use and the placement of a balance line is
very important. Most drain failures are the result of an improper balance
line installation. The balance line should be 1/4" tubing or larger, and Venting to
installed on top of a pipe or vessel, not the bottom. A needle valve is Atmosphere
recommended for controlling the air flow. Avoid having any loops or low
areas in the balance line that might allow moisture to collect in the line
and prevent the passage of air from the drains reservoir.
6/99
1/8" NPT
Control Air Inlet
Test Button
1/8" NPT
8.4
Vent
3/4" NPT Inlet
(Optional)
1.7
3.0
9.1
3.0
3/4" NPT Inlet
1/2" NPT
Drain Outlet
6.5
1.4
12.3
6.0
13.5 AIR SYSTEM PRODUCTS
DRAWN BY: WDN Lancaster, NY 14086 USA
DATE: 12/17/07 www.airsyspro.com
TITLE: Robo-Drain RD11-9.5-T
Dimensional Drawing
DWG.: RD11-9.5-T REV. -

Atlasco Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Atlasco Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Rockson International Group

National Integrated Power Plant

Section 2 Bill of Material

Section 3 Compressor – Atlas Copco ZT110-10HAT

Section 4 Dryer – Atlas Copco AD300

Section 5 AfterCooler – AKG Thermal CC600-3

1061089-Table of Contents Page 1 of 2

1061089-Table of Contents Page 2 of 2

General Arrangement Drawing

To: ROCKSON INTERNATIONAL GROUP Date: 4/22/2010

Serial No. 1061089

20 5 76-4J6 TRERICE - 1/2-IN INSTRUMENT, 3/4-IN PROCESS

24 1 1061089-INSULATE FRONTIER INSULATION CONTRACTORS, INC.

ZR/ZT 110-750-FF & ZR/ZT 132-900 VSD-FF

 Energy, safety & reliability

Choice The right drive Optimal use

Expertise The integrated design Trouble-free installation & commissioning

The professional follow-up

When it comes to clean, oil-free compressed air

Now Atlas Copco has achieved a new milestone:

Why a new class? First to achieve ISO 8573-1 CLASS 0

Often referred to as “technically oil-free air”, Z-Oil-free rotary screw compressor

tion of a process. Therefore, with oil-injected Oil-injected compressor with filters

1 Advanced Elektronikon control and monitoring system

Watercooled ZR: ZR/ZT 110-750-FF and

0 120 260 2500 l/s

2 Integrated frequency converter for Variable Speed Drive operation

Complete ZR/ZT range Aircooled ZT-FF:

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 l/s

World class oil-free compression element Reliable element intake protection

 high overall efficiency, thanks to:

– superior rotor coating

High precision drive system

AGMA Q13/DIN Class 5 gears

 low noise and vibration

Superior element bearings

 bearings operate below wear limit

Totally enclosed motor

High efficiency + high reliability water cooling (ZR) Water separator

 mechanical interlock of inlet and blow-off valves

High efficiency + high reliability air cooling (ZT)

 easy access for cleaning

 low noise + low energy cooling fans

Advanced Elektronikon® control and monitoring system

 all monitoring and control functions via one interface

 wide communication possibilities

 integration possible in many process control systems

(field bus system)

Direct energy savings of up to 35% Indirect energy savings

Additional VSD benefits

 The stable system pressure provides stability for all

investment energy savings with VSD

Predicting your savings  No current peaks during start-up

 Savings in electrical installation - smaller breakers, fuses,

The magic of VSD

The frequency of the drive motor is continuously adapted to the

2 EMC tested and certified

5 Tested over complete speed range

Combined motor/converter efficiency

minimum maximum minimum maximum

Dry compressed air out of the box

 The IMD adsorption dryer eliminates the moisture before

No external energy is needed to dry the air, resulting

 The pressure drop through the dryer is minimal, which